frequency - temco industrial powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/manual/cfw08.pdf · fault...

205

Upload: trinhngoc

Post on 06-Mar-2018

221 views

Category:

Documents


0 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel
Page 2: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

04/2006

FREQUENCY

INVERTER

MANUAL

Series: CFW-08Software: version 4.1X0899.5242 E/8

ATTENTION!It is very important to check if the

inverter software version is the

same as indicated above.

Page 3: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

4

CONTENTS

The table below describes all revisions made to this manual.

Revision Description Section1 First Edition -2 Item 3.3 - CE Installation Included See item 3.33 General Revision -4 External Parallel Keypad and See item 8.3

Fixs Kit Included and and 8.16General Revision

5 Description changed of the See item 8.5Parallel Cable

for the External Parallel Keypad.Item 7.5 (Spare Part List) Removed.

Parameter P536 included and 6.3.5and General Revision

6 General Revision -7 Inclusion of new models (22A, 28A and See item 9.1

33A/200-240V; 24A and 30A/380-480V);Addition of new I/O functions See item 3.2.5

on the control board;Modification of circuit breakers table; See item 3.2.3

Modification of Chapter 3(installation and connections);

Modification of parameters See item 4.2.4incompatibility table;

Addition of parameters P253, See item 6.3P267 and P268

Addition of new functions at parametersP235, P239, P295 and P404;Modification of factorydefault See item 6.3.3

value of parameter P248;Addition of error code E32; See item 7.1

8 General Revision;Inclusion of items into the table of See item 4.2.4

parameters incompatibility;Change on the WEG part number See item 8

of the optional devices;Inclusion of the table containing the See item 3.1.3.1

airflow requirements for panel mounting;Inclusion of the following optionals: See items

KRS-485-CFW08, KFB-CO-CFW08, 8.11 to 8.14KFB-DN-CFW08 and KAC-120-CFW08;

Inclusion of the new versions See item 2.4of the control board: A3 and A4

Page 4: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

5

CONTENTS

Quick Parameter Reference,Fault and Status Messages

I Parameters ...............................................................10II Fault Messages ......................................................... 18III Other Messages ........................................................18

CHAPTER 1Safety Notices

1.1 Safety Notices in the Manual ....................................191.2 Safety Notice on The Product ..................................191.3 Preliminary Recommendations ................................ 19

CHAPTER 2General Information

2.1 About this Manual .................................................... 212.2 Software Version .................................................... 212.3 About the CFW-08 .................................................. 22

2.3.1 Differences between the old line and theNew CFW-08 ...................................................26

2.4 CFW-08 Identification ............................................. 312.5 Receiving and Storing ............................................. 34

CHAPTER 3Installation

3.1 Mechanical Installation............................................. 353.1.1 Environment .....................................................353.1.2 Mounting Specifications ....................................353.1.3 Positioning and Fixing ......................................38

3.1.3.1 Panel Mounting ........................................ 393.1.3.2 Surface Mounting ..................................... 40

3.2 Electrical Installtion .................................................403.2.1 Power / Grounding Terminals .............................403.2.2 Location of the Power Terminals, Grounding

Terminals and Control Terminal Connections ......423.2.3 Wiring and Circuit-Breakers for the Power

and Grounding Connections .............................. 433.2.4 Power Connections ...........................................44

3.2.4.1 AC Input Connection............................... 463.2.4.2 Output Connections .................................473.2.4.3 Grounding Connections ........................... 47

3.2.5 Control Wiring .................................................. 493.2.5.1 Digital inputs as low level active

(S1:1 to OFF).......................................... 533.2.5.2 Digital Input as high level active

(S1:1 to ON) ............................................533.2.6 Typical Terminal Connections ............................55

Page 5: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

6

CONTENTS

3.3 European EMC Directive - Requirementsfor Conforming Installations..................................... 58

3.3.1 Installation......................................................... 583.3.2 Emission and Immunity Levels Description ........593.3.3 Inverter Models and Filters ................................ 613.3.4 EMC Filters Characteristics Filter ...................... 63

CHAPTER 4Keypad (HMI) Operation

4.1 Keypad (HMI) Description ....................................... 684.2 Use of the Keypad HMI............................................ 69

4.2.1 Keypad Operation ............................................ 704.2.2 Inverter Status ................................................... 714.2.3 Read-Only Variables ......................................... 714.2.4 Parameter Viewing and Programming ............... 72

CHAPTER 5Start-up

5.1 Pre-Power Checks .................................................. 755.2 Initial Power-up ....................................................... 755.3 Start-up ... ...............................................................76

5.3.1 Start-up Operation via Keypad (HMI) -Type of Control: Linear V/F (P202=0) ................ 77

5.3.2 Start-up Operation via Terminals -Control Mode: Linear V/F (P202=0) ..................78

5.3.3 Start-up Operation via Keypad -Control Mode: Vector (P202=2) ......................... 79

CHAPTER 6Detailed Parameter Description

6.1 Symbols ...... ........................................................... 846.2 Introduction ............................................................. 84

6.2.1 Control Modes .................................................. 846.2.2 V/F Control ....................................................... 846.2.3 Vector Control (VVC) ........................................ 856.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources .......................... 866.2.5 Commands ...................................................... 896.2.6 Local/Remote Operation Modes........................ 89

6.3 Parameter Listing ................................................... 906.3.1 Access and Read Only Parameters -

P000 to P099................................................... 916.3.2 Regulation Parameters - P100 to P199 .............936.3.3 Configuration Parameters - P200 to P398 ....... 1036.3.4 Motor Parameters - P399 to P499................... 1276.3.5 Special Function Paramaters - P500 to P599 .. 130

6.3.5.1 PID Introduction ......................................1306.3.5.2 Description ............................................ 1306.3.5.3 PID Start-up Guide .................................136

Page 6: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

7

CONTENTS

CHAPTER 7Diagnostics and Troubleshooting

7.1 Faults and Possible Causes .................................. 1397.2 Troubleshooting .................................................... 1427.3 Contacting WEG................................................... 1437.4 Preventive Maintenance ........................................ 143

7.4.1 Cleaning Instructions ....................................... 144

CHAPTER 8CFW-08 Options and Accessories

8.1 HMI-CFW08-P ...................................................... 1478.1.1 Instructions for Insertion and Removing of

the HMI-CFW08-P .......................................... 1478.2 TCL-CFW08......................................................... 1478.3 HMI-CFW08-RP.................................................... 148

8.3.1 HMI-CFW08-RP Installation ............................. 1488.4 MIP-CFW08-RP.................................................... 1498.5 CAB-RP-1, CAB-RP-2, CAB-RP-3, CAB-RP-5,

CAB-RP-7.5, CAB-RP-10 .................................... 1498.6 HMI-CFW08-RS.................................................... 149

8.6.1 HMI-CFW08-RS Installation ............................. 1508.6.2 HMI-CFW08-RS Start-up .................................1508.6.3 Keypad Copy Function .................................... 151

8.7 MIS-CFW08-RS.................................................... 1518.8 CAB-RS-1, CAB-RS-2, CAB-RS-3, CAB-RS-5,

CAB-RS-7.5, CAB-RS-10 .................................... 1518.9 KCS-CFW08........................................................ 152

8.9.1 Instructions for KCS-CFW08Insertion/Removal ...........................................153

8.10 KSD-CFW08...................................................... 1538.11 KRS-485-CFW08 ............................................... 1548.12 KFB-CO-CFW08 ................................................1558.13 KFB-DN-CFW08 ................................................1568.14 KAC-120-CFW08, KAC-120-CFW08-N1M1

KAC-120-CFW08-N1M2 ..................................... 1588.15 KMD-CFW08-M1................................................1598.16 KFIX-CFW08-M1, KFIX-CFW08-M2 ................... 1608.17 KN1-CFW08-M1, KN1-CFW08-M2 ..................... 1618.18 RFI Filters ........................................................... 1628.19 Line Reactor ....................................................... 163

8.19.1 Application Criteria ......................................1648.20 Load Reactor...................................................... 1668.21 Dynamic Braking ................................................167

8.21.1 Resistor Sizing ............................................ 1678.21.2 Installation ................................................... 168

8.22 Serial Communication......................................... 1698.22.1 Introduction ................................................. 1698.22.2 Interfaces Description .................................. 170

Page 7: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

8

CONTENTS

8.22.2.1 RS-485 ............................................ 1718.22.2.2 RS-232 ............................................ 172

8.22.3 Definitions .................................................. 1728.22.3.1 Used Terms ...................................... 1728.22.3.2 Parameter/Variables Resolution ....... 1738.22.3.3 Character Format ............................. 1738.22.3.4 Protocol ........................................... 1738.22.3.5 Execution and Message Test ............ 1758.22.3.6 Message Sequence ......................... 1768.22.3.7 Varaiable Code................................ 176

8.22.4 Message Examples .................................... 1778.22.5 Variables and Errors of the Serial

Communication .......................................... 1778.22.5.1 Basic Variables ................................ 1778.22.5.2 Messages Examples with Basic

Variables .......................................... 1808.22.5.3 Parameters Related to the Serial

Communication .................................. 1818.22.5.4 Errors Related to the Serial

Communication ................................ 1828.22.6 Times for Read/Write of Messages .............. 1828.22.7 Physical Connection RS-232 and

RS-485 Interface ......................................... 1838.23 Modbus-RTU ...................................................... 184

8.23.1 Introduction to Modbus-RTU Protocol ........... 1848.23.1.1 Transmission Modes ........................ 1848.23.1.2 Message Structure in RTU Mode ...... 184

8.23.2 Operation of the CFW-08 in theModbus-RTU Network ................................. 187

8.23.2.1 Interface Description ........................ 1878.23.2.2 Inverter Configuration in the

Modbus-RTU Network...................... 1878.23.2.3 Access to the Inverter Data ............... 188

8.23.3 Detailed Function Description ..................... 1918.23.3.1 Function 01 - Read Coils .................. 1918.23.3.2 Function 03 - Read Holding Register 1928.23.3.3 Function 05 - Write Single Coil ......... 1938.23.3.4 Function 06 - Write Single Register .. 1948.23.3.5 Function 15 - Write Multiple Coils ...... 1948.23.3.6 Function 16 - Write Multiple Registers1958.23.3.7 Function 43 - Read Device

Identification .................................... 1968.23.4 Communication Errors ................................ 198

8.23.4.1 Error Messages .............................. 199

Page 8: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

9

CONTENTS

CHAPTER 9Technical Specifications

9.1Power Data ........................................................... 2009.1.1 200 - 240V Power Supply ...............................2009.1.2 380 - 480V Power Supply ...............................201

9.2 Electronics/General Data ......................................2049.3 WEG Standard IV Pole Motor Data........................ 205

Page 9: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

10

CFW-08 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Software: V4.1XApplication:Model:Serial Number:Responsible:Date: / / .

I. Parameters

QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE, FAULT AND STATUS MESSAGES

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Unit User PageSetting Setting

P000 Parameter Access 0 to 4 = Read 0 - - 915 = Alteration6 to 999 = Read

READ ONLY PARAMETERS - P002 to P099P002 Fequency Proportional Value 0 to 6553 - - - 91

(P208xP005)P003 Motor Output Current 0 to 1.5xI

nom- A - 91

P004 DC Link Voltage 0 to 862 - V - 91P005 Motor Output Frequency 0.00 to 99.99 - Hz - 91

100.0 to 300.0P007 Motor Output Voltage 0 to 600 - V - 91P008 Heatsink Temperature 25 to 110 - °C - 92P009 (1) Motor Torque 0.0 to 150.0 - % - 92P014 Last Fault 00 to 41 - - - 92P023 Software Version x . y z - - - 92P040 PID Process Variable 0 to 6553 - - - 92

(Value % x P528)REGULATION PARAMETERS - P100 to P199Ramps

P100 Acceleration Time 0.1 to 999 5.0 s 93P101 Deceleration Time 0.1 to 999 10.0 s 93P102 Acceleration Time Ramp 2 0.1 to 999 5.0 s 93P103 Deceleration Time Ramp 2 0.1 to 999 10.0 s 93P104 S Ramp 0 = Inactive 0 % 93

1 = 502 = 100

Frequency ReferenceP120 Digital Reference Backup 0 = Inactive 1 - 94

1 = Active2 = Backup by P121(or P525 - PID)

P121 Keypad Reference P133 to P134 3.00 - 94P122 JOG Speed Reference 0.00 to P134 5.00 - 94P124 Multispeed Reference 1 P133 to P134 3.00 - 95P125 Multispeed Reference 2 P133 to P134 10.00 - 95P126 Multispeed Reference 3 P133 to P134 20.00 - 95P127 Multispeed Reference 4 P133 to P134 30.00 - 95P128 Multispeed Reference 5 P133 to P134 40.00 - 95P129 Multispeed Reference 6 P133 to P134 50.00 - 95P130 Multispeed Reference 7 P133 to P134 60.00 - 95P131 Multispeed Reference 8 P133 to P134 66.00 - 95

Page 10: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

11

Summary of Revisions

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Unit User PageSetting Setting

(*) The factory default of Parameter P136 depends on the inverter model as follows:- models 1.6-2.6-4.0-7.0A/200-240V and 1.0-1.6-2.6-4.0A/380-480V: P136=5.0%;- models 7.3-10-16A/200-240V and 2.7-4.3-6.5-10A/380-480V: P136=2.0%;- models 22-28-33A/200-240V and 13-16-24-30A/380-480V: P136=1.0%.

Speed LimitsP133 Minimum Frequency (Fmin) 0.00 to P134 3.00 Hz 96P134 Maximum Frequency (Fmax) P133 to 300.0 66.00 Hz 96

V/F ControlP136 (2)(*) Manual Torque Boost 0.0 to 30.0 5.0 or % 96

(IxR Compensation) 2.0 or1.0 (*)

P137 (2) Aut. Torque Boost 0.00 to 1.00 0.00 - 97(Aut. IxR Compensation)

P138 (2) Slip Compensation 0.0 to 10.0 0.0 % 98P142 (2)(3) Maximum Output Voltage 0.0 to 100 100 % 99P145 (2)(3) Field Weakening P133 to P134 50.00Hz or Hz 99

Frequency(Fnom) 60.00Hzdepending

on themarket

DC Link Voltage RegulationP151 DC Link Regulation Level 200V models: 325 to 410 380 V 100

400V models: 564 to 820 780Overload Current

P156 Motor Overload Current 0.2xInom to 1.3xInom 1.2xP401 A 101Current Limitation

P169 Maximum Output Current 0.2xInom

to 2.0xInom

1.5xInom

A 101Flux Control

P178 (1) Rated Flux 50.0 to 150.0 100 % 101CONFIGURATION PARAMETERS - P200 to P398Generic Parameters

P202 (3) Control Mode 0=Linear V/F Control (Scalar) 0 - 1031=QuadraticV/FControl (Scalar)2=Sensorless Vector

P203 (3) Special Function Selection 0=No function 0 - 1041=PID Regulator

P204 (3) Load Factory Setting 0 to 4=No Function 0 - 1055=Loads Factory Default

P205 (3) Display Default Selection 0=P005 2 - 1051=P0032=P0023=P0074, 5=Not used6=P040

P206 Auto-Reset Time 0 to 255 0 s 105P208 Reference Scale Factor 0.00 to 99.9 1.00 - 105P215 (3)(4) Keypad Copy Function 0=Not Used 0 - 106

1=Copy (inverter to keypad)2=Paste (keypad to inverter)

P219 (3) Switching Frequency 0.00 to 25.00 6.00 Hz 107Reduction Point

Page 11: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

12

CFW-08 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Local/Remote DefinitionP220 (3) Local/Remote 0=Always Local 2 - 108

Selection Source 1=Always Remote2=HMI-CFW08-P orHMI-CFW08-RP keypad(default: local)3=HMI-CFW08-P orHMI-CFW08-RP keypad(default: remote)4=DI2 to DI45=Serial or HMI-CFW08-RSkeypad (default: local)6=Serial or HMI-CFW08-RSkeypad (default: remote)

P221 (3) FrequencyLocal Reference 0 = Keypad and 0 - 109Selection 1 = AI1

2, 3 = AI24 = E.P. (Electronic Pot.)5 = Serial6 = Multispeed7 = Add AI08 = Add AI

P222 (3) FrequencyRemote Reference 0 =Keypad and 1 - 109Selection 1 = AI1

2, 3 = AI24 = E.P. (Eletronic Pot.)5 = Serial6 = Multispeed7 = Add AI08 = Add AI

P229 (3) Local Command Selection 0 = HMI-CFW08-P or 0 - 109HMI-CFW08-RP keypad1 = Terminals2 = Serial orHMI-CFW08-RS keypad

P230 (3) Remote Command Selection 0 = HMI-CFW08-P or 1 - 109HMI-CFW08-RP keypad1 = Terminals2 = Serial orHMI-CFW08-RS keypad

P231 (3) Forward/Reverse Selection 0 = Forward 2 - 1101 = Reverse2 = CommandsAnalog Input(s)

P234 Analog Input AI1 Gain 0.00 to 9.99 1.00 - 110P235 (3)(5) Analog Input AI1 Function 0 = (0 to 10)V/(0 to 20)mA 0 - 111

(-10 to +10)V**1 = (4 to 20 )mA2 = DI5 PNP3 = DI5 NPN4 = DI5 TTL5 = PTC

P236 Analog Input AI1 Offset -120 to +120 0.0 % 112P238 (5) Analog Input AI2 Gain 0.00 to 9.99 1.00 - 112

Parameter Function Adjustable RangeFactory

UnitUser

PageSetting Setting

** Only available on the Control Board A2 (see item 2.4). For programming instructions, please, refer to the parameter P235 detailed description.

Page 12: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

13

CFW-08 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Unit User PageSetting Setting

P239(3)(5)(6) Analog Input AI2 Function 0 = (0 to 10)V/(0 to 20)mA 0 - 112(-10 to +10)V**1 = (4 to 20 )mA2 = DI5 PNP3 = DI5 NPN4 = DI5 TTL5 = PTC

P240 (6) Analog Input AI2 Offset -120 to +120 0.0 % 112P248 Analog Inputs Filter 0 to 200 10 ms 113

Time ConstantAnalog Output

P251 (6) Analog Output 0=Output Frequency (Fs) 0 - 113AO Function 1= Input Reference (Fe)

2=Output Current (Is)

3, 5, 8 = Not used4=Motor Torque6=Process Variable(PID)7=Active Current9=PID Setpoint

P252 (6) Analog Output AO Gain 0.00 to 9.99 1.00 - 113P253 Analog Output (AO) Signal 0 = (0 to 10)V/(0 to 20)mA 0 - 113

1 = (4 to 20)mADigital Inputs

P263 (3) Digital Input DI1 Function 0 = No Function or 0 - 114General Enable1 to 7 and 10 to 12 =General Enable8 = Forward Run9 = Start/Stop13 = FWD Run UsingRamp 214 = Start (3-wire)

P264 (3) Digital Input DI2 Function 0 = Forward/Reverse 0 - 1141 = Local/Remote2 to 6 and 9 to 12 =Not used7 = Multispeed (MS2)8 = Reverse13 = REV Run - Ramp 214 = Stop (3-wire)

P265 (3)(7) Digital Input DI3 Function 0 = Forward/Reverse 10 - 1141 = Local/Remote2 = General Enable3 = JOG4 = No External Fault5 = Increase E.P.6 = Ramp 27 = Multispeed (MS1)8 = No Function orStart/Stop9 = Start/Stop10 = Reset

** Only available on the Control Board A2 (see item 2.4). For programming instructions, please, refer to the parameter P235 detailed description.

Page 13: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

14

Summary of Revisions

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Unit User PageSetting Setting

11, 12 = Not used13 = Flying Start Disable14 = Multispeed (MS1)Using Ramp 215 = Manual/Automatic PID)16 = Increase E.P. withRamp 2

P266 (3) Digital Input DI4 Function 0 = Forward/Reverse 8 - 1141 = Local/Remote2 = General Enable3 = JOG4 = No Extrernal Fault5 = Decrease E.P.6 = Ramp 27 = Multispeed (MS0)8 = Not used orStart/Stop9 = Start/Stop10 = Reset11, 12 and 14, 15=Not Used13 = Flying Start Disable16 = Decrease E.P. withRamp 2

P267 (3)(5) Function of the Digital 0 = FWD/REV 11 - 114InputDI5 (only displayed 1 = Local/Remotewhen P235 = 2,3 or 4) 2 = General Enable

3 = JOG4 = No external fault5 = Increase E.P.6 = Ramp 27 = Multispeed (MS2)8 = Not used or Start/Stop9 = Start/Stop10 = Reset11, 12 and 14, 15=Not Used13 = Disables Flying Start16 = Increase E.P. withRamp 2

P268 (3)(5) Function of the Digital 0 = FWD/REV 11 - 114Input DI6(only displayed 1 = Local/Remotewhen P239 = 2,3 or 4) 2 = General Enable

3 = JOG4 = No external fault5 = Decrease E.P.6 = Ramp 27 = Multispeed (MS2)8 = Not used or Start/Stop9 = Start/Stop10 = Reset11, 12 and 14, 15=Not Used13 = Disables Flying Start16 = Decrease E.P. withRamp 2

Page 14: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

15

CFW-08 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Unit User PageSetting Setting

(*) It is not possible to set P297=7 (15 kHz) in vector control mode (P202=2) or when the external serial keypad (HMI-CFW08-RS) is used.

Accordingto the

invertermodel

312 = 22A313 = 24A314 = 28A315 = 30A316 = 33A

Digital Output(s)P277 (3) Relay Output RL1 Function 0 = Fs>Fx 7 119

1 = Fe>Fx2 = Fs=Fe3 = Is>Ix -4 and 6 = Not used5 = Run7 = No Fault

P279 (3)(6) Relay Output RL2 Function 0 = Fs>Fx 0 1191 = Fe>Fx2 = Fs=Fe3 = Is>Ix -4 and 6 = Not used5 = Run7 = No Fault

Fx and IxP288 Fx Frequency 0.00 to P134 3.00 Hz 121P290 Ix Current 0 to 1.5xInom 1.0xInom A 121

Inverter DataP295(3) Rated Inverter 300 = 1.0A 121

Current (Inom

) 301 = 1.6A302 = 2.6A303 = 2.7A304 = 4.0A305 = 4.3A306 = 6.5A -307 = 7.0A308 = 7.3A309 = 10A310 = 13A311 = 16A

P297 (3) Switching Frequency 4 = 5.0 4 1215 = 2.5 kHz6 = 107 = 15 (*)

DC BrakingP300 DC Braking Time 0.0 to 15.0 0.0 s 123P301 DC Braking Start Frequency 0.00 to 15.00 1.00 Hz 123P302 DC Braking Current 0.0 to 130 0.0 % 123

Skip FrequenciesP303 Skip Frequency 1 P133 to P134 20.00 Hz 124P304 Skip Frequency 2 P133 to P134 30.00 Hz 124P306 Skip Band Range 0.00 to 25.00 0.00 Hz 124

Serial Communication Interface IP308 (3) InverterAddress 1 to 30 (Serial WEG) 1 - 125

1 to 247 (Modbus-RTU)Flying Start and Ride-Through

P310 (3) Flying Start and Ride-Through 0 = Inactive 0 - 1251 = Flying Start2 = Flying Start andRide-Through3 = Ride-Through

Page 15: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

16

CFW-08 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Unit User PageSetting Setting

Accordingto inverter

model(motor

matchedto the

inverter -see item

9.3)and sales

market

P311 Voltage Ramp 0.1 to 10.0 5.0 s 125Serial Communication Interface II

P312 (3) Serial Interface Protocol 0= Serial WEG 0 - 1261= Modbus-RTU 9600 bps

without parity2= Modbus-RTU 9600 bps

with odd parity3= Modbus-RTU 9600 bps

with even parity4= Modbus-RTU 19200 bps

without parity5= Modbus-RTU 19200 bps

with odd parity6= Modbus-RTU 19200 bps

with even parity7= Modbus-RTU 38400 bps

without parity8= Modbus-RTU 38400 bps

with odd parity9= Modbus-RTU 38400 bps

with even parityP313 Serial Interface Watchdog 0 = Disabling by ramp 2 - 127

Action 1 = General disable2 = Shows only E283 = Goes to local mode

P314 Serial Interface Watchdog 0.0=Disables the function 0.0 s 127Timeout 0.1 to 99.9 = Set valueMOTOR PARAMETERS - P399 to P499Rated Parameters

P399 (1)(3) Rated Motor Efficiency 50.0 to 99.9 % 127P400 (1)(3) Rated Motor Voltage 0 to 600 V 127P401 Rated Motor Current 0.3xI

nomto 1.3xI

nomA 128

P402 (1) Rated Motor Speed 0 to 9999 rpm 128P403 (1)(3) Rated Motor Frequency 0.00 to P134 Hz 128P404 (1)(3) Rated Motor Power 0 = 0.16HP / 0.12kW - 128

1 = 0.25HP / 0.18kW2 = 0.33HP / 0.25kW3 = 0.50HP / 0.37kW4 = 0.75HP / 0.55kW5 = 1HP / 0.75kW6 = 1.5HP / 1.1kW7 = 2HP / 1.5kW8 = 3HP / 2.2kW9 = 4HP / 3.0kW10 = 5HP / 3.7kW11 = 5.5HP / 4.0kW12 = 6HP / 4.5kW13 = 7.5HP / 5.5kW14 = 10HP / 7.5kW15 = 12.5HP / 9.2kW16 = 15HP / 11,0kW17 = 20HP / 15,0kW

Page 16: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

17

CFW-08 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Parameter Function Adjustable Range Factory Unit User PageSetting Setting

Notes found on the Parameters Quick Reference.

(1) This parameter is only displayed in vector mode(P202=2).

(2) This parameter is only displayed in scalar mode P202=0or 1.

(3) This parameter can be enchanged only when the inverteris disabled (stopped motor).

(4) This parameter is only available with HMI-CFW08-RS.(5) The analog input value is represented by zero when it is

not connected to an external signal.(6) This parameter is only available in the CFW-08 Plus

version.(7) The parameter value changes automatically when

P203=1.

According toinvertermodel

According toinvertermodel

P407 (3) Rated Motor Power 0.50 to 0.99 - 129Factor

Measured ParametersP408 (1)(3) Self-Tuning 0 = No 0 - 129

1 = YesP409 (3) Motor Stator Resistance 0.00 to 99.99 129

SPECIAL FUNCTION - P500 to P599PID Regulator

P520 PID Proportional Gain 0.000 to 7.999 1.000 - 137P521 PID Integral Gain 0.000 to 9.999 1.000 - 137P522 PID Differential Gain 0.000 to 9.999 0.000 - 137P525 Setpoint Via Keypad of the 0.00 to 100.0 0.00 % 137

PID RegulatorP526 Process Variable Filter 0.01 to 10.00 0.10 s 137P527 PID Action 0 = Direct 0 - 137

1 = ReverseP528 Process Variable 0.00 to 99.9 1.00 - 138

Scale FactorP536 Automatic Setting of P525 0=Active 0 - 138

1=Inactive

Page 17: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

18

CFW-08 - QUICK PARAMETER REFERENCE

Display Description PageE00 Output Overcurrent/Short-Circuit 139E01 DC Link Overvoltage 139E02 DC Link Undervoltage 140E04 Inverter Overtemperature 140E05 Output Overload (Ixt Function) 140E06 External Fault 140E08 CPU Error (Watchdog) 140E09 Program Memory Error (Checksum) 140E10 Keypad Copy Function Error 140E14 Self-tuning Fault 140

E22, E25, Serial Communication Error 140E26 and E27

E24 Programming Error 140E28 Serial Interface Watchdog Timeout Error 140E31 Keypad Connection Fault (HMI-CFW08-RS) 140E32 Motor overtemperature (External PTC) 140E41 Self-Diagnosis Fault 141

II. Fault Messages

III. Other Messages Display Descriptionrdy Inverter is ready to be enabled

SubPower suplly voltage is too low for the inverteroperation (Undervoltage)

dcbr Inverter in DC braking modeauto Inverter is running self-tuning routine

copyKeypad Copy Function in Progress (only available inthe HMI-CFW08-RS) - inverter to keypad

pastKeypad Copy Function in Progress (only available inthe HMI-CFW08-RS) - Keypad to Inverter

Page 18: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

19

CHAPTER 1

SAFETY NOTICES

This Manual contains necessary information for the correctuse of the CFW-8 Variable Frequency Drive.This Manual has been written for qualified personnel withsuitable training and technical qualification to operate this typeof equipment.

The following Safety Notices will be used in this Manual:

DANGER!If the recommended Safety Notices are not strictly observed,it can lead to serious or fatal injuries of personnel and/ormaterial damage.

ATTENTION!Failure to observe the recommended Safety Procedures canlead to material damage.

NOTE!The content of this Manual supplies important information forthe correct understanding of operation and proper performanceof the equipment.

The following symbols may be attached to theproduct, servingas Safety Notice:

High Voltages

Components sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Do nottouch them without proper grounding procedures.

Mandatory connection to ground protection (PE)

Shield connection to ground

DANGER!Only qualified personnel should plan or implement theinstallation, start- up, operation and maintenance of thisequipment. Personnel must review entire Manual beforeattempting to install, operate or troubleshoot the CFW-08.

1.3 PRELIMINARYRECOMMENDATIONS

1.2 SAFETY NOTICE ON THEPRODUCT

1.1 SAFETY NOTICES IN THEMANUAL

Page 19: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

20

CHAPTER 1 - SAFETY NOTICES

These personnel must follow all safety instructions included in thisManual and/or defined by local regulations.Failure to comply with these instructions may result in personnelinjury and/or equipment damage.

NOTE!In this Manual, qualified personnel are defined as people that aretrained to:

1. Install, ground, power up and operate the CFW-08 accordingto this Manual and the local required safety procedures;

2. Use of safety equipment according to the local regulations;3. Administer Cardio Pulmonary Resuscitation (CPR) and

First Aid.

DANGER!The inverter control circuit (ECC3, DSP) and the HMI-CFW08-Pare not grounded. They are high voltage circuits.

DANGER!Always disconnect the supply voltage before touching anyelectrical component inside the inverter.Many components are charged with high voltages, even after theincoming AC power supply has been disconnected or switchedOFF. Wait at least 10 minutes for the total discharge of the powercapacitors.Always connect the frame of theequipment to the ground (PE) atthe suitable connection point.

ATTENTION!All electronic boards have components that are sensitive toelectrostatic discharges. Never touch any of the electricalcomponents or connectors without following proper groundingprocedures. If necessary to do so, touch the properly groundedmetallic frame or use a suitable ground strap.

NOTE!Inverters can interfere with other electronic equipment. In order toreduce this interference, adopt the measures recommended inSection 3 “Installation”.

NOTE!Read this entire Manual carefully and completely before installingor operating the CFW-08.

Do not apply High Voltage (High Pot) Test on the Inverter!If this test is necessary, contact the Manufacturer.

Page 20: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

21

This chapter 2 defines the contents and purposes of this ma-nual and describes the main characteristics of the CFW-08frequency inverter. Identification, receiving inspections andstorage requirements are also provided.

This Manual is divided into 9 Chapter, providing infornation totheuser on how receive, install, start-up and operate the CFW-08:

Chapter 1 - Safety Notices;Chapter 2 - General Information and receiving the CFW-08;Chapter 3 - Installation;Chapter 4 - Start-up, steps to follow;Chapter 5 - Keypad HMI Operation;Chapter 6 - Detailed Parameter Description;Chapter 7 - Diagnostic and Troubleshooting;Chapter 8 - CFW-08 Options and Accessories;Chapter 9 - Technical Specifications;

This Manual provides information for the correct use of theCFW-08. The CFW-08 is very flexible and allows for theoperation in many different modes as described in this manu-al.As the CFW-08 can be applied in several ways, it is impossibleto describe here all of the application possibilities. WEG doesnot accept any responsibility when the CFW-08 is not usedaccording to this Manual.No part of this Manual may be reproduced in any form, withoutthe written permission of WEG.

It is important to note the Software Version installed in theVersion CFW-08, since it defines the functions and theprogramming parameters of the inverter.This Manual refers to the Software version indicated on theinside cover. For example, the Version 3.0X applies to versions3.00 to 3.09, where “X” is a variable that will change due tominor software revisions. The operation of the CFW-08 withthese software revisions are still covered by this version ofthe Manual.

The Software Version can be read in the Parameter P023.

GENERALINFORMATION

2.1 ABOUT THIS MANUAL

2.2 SOFTWARE VERSION

CHAPTER 2

Page 21: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

22

CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATION

2.3 ABOUT THE CFW-08 TThe CFW-08 VFD provides two control options: vectorcontrol (VVC: voltage vector control) or V/Hz (scalar); bothtypes of control can be set according to the application.

In thevector control mode, themotor performance is optimizedrelating to torque and speed regulation.The "Self-Tuning" function, available in vector control, permitsthe automatic setting of the inverter parameter from theidentification (also automatic) of the parameters of the motorconnected at the inverter output.

The V/F (scalar) mode is recommended for more simpleapplications such as pump and fan drives. In these cases onecan reduce the motor and inverter losses by using the"Quadratic V/F" option, that results in energy saving.The V/F mode is also used when more than one motor shouldbe driven simultaneously by one inverter (multimotorapplication).

There are two CFW-08 versions:Standard: it has 4 digital inputs (DIs), 1 analog input (AI) and1 relay output.CFW-08 Plus: compared to the standard version it has oneadditional analog input and one additional relay output. It hasalso an analog output (AO).

For power ratings and further technical information, seeChaper 9.

O blocodiagrama a seguir proporciona uma visão de conjun-to do CFW-08.

Page 22: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

23

CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATION

Figure 2.1 - Block diagram for the models:1.6-2.6-4.0-7.0A/200-240V and 1.0-1.6-2.6-4.0A/380-480V

PowerSupply

RST

PE

PC-SoftwareSuperDrive

AnalogInputs

(AI1 andAI2)

DigitalInputs

(DI1 to DI4)

POWERCONTROL

POWER SUPPLIES ANDCONTROL/ POWER INTERFACES

"ECC3"CONTROL

BOARDWITH DSP

AnalogOutput(AO)

RelayOutput

(RL1 andRL2)

MotorUVW

Rsh2

Rsh1

NTC

PERFI Filter

InterfaceRS-232 KCS-CFW08

InterfaceMIS-CFW08-RS

HMI-CFW08-P

InterfaceMIP-CFW08-RP

or

or

or

HMI-CFW08-RS

HMI-CFW08-RP

RS-485

CANopenor

DeviceNet

KRS-485

KFB-CO or KFB-DN

Page 23: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

24

CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATION

Figura 2.2– Block diagram for the models:7.3-10-16-22A/200-240V and 2.7-4.3-6.5-10-13-16A/380-480V

Note: Model 16A and 22A/200-240V is not fitted with RFI filter (optional).

PowerSupply

RST

RFISuppressor

Filter(optional)

PC-SoftwareSuperDrive

AnalogInputs

(AI1 andAI2)

DigitalInputs

(DI1 to DI4)

POWERCONTROL

POWER SUPPLIES ANDCONTROL/ POWER INTERFACES

"ECC3"CONTROL

BOARDWITH DSP

AnalogOutput(AO)

RelayOutput

(RL1 andRL2)

MotorUVW

Rsh2

Rsh1

RPC

Pre-Charge

BrakingResistor (External and Optional)

BR+UD

PE-UD Voltage

FeedbackPE

HMI-CFW08-RS

HMI-CFW08-RP

InterfaceRS-232 KCS-CFW08

InterfaceMIS-CFW08-RS

HMI-CFW08-P

InterfaceMIP-CFW08-RP

or

or

or

RFI Filter

RS-485

CANopenor

DeviceNet

KRS-485

KFB-CO or KFB-DN

Page 24: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

25

CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATION

Figure 2.3 – Block diagram for the models:28-33A/200-240V and 24-30A/380-480V

Note: Model 28A and 33A/200-240V is not fitted RFI filter (optional)

PowerSupply

RST

RFISuppressor

Filter(optional)

HMI-CFW08-RS

PC-SoftwareSuperDrive

AnalogInputs

(AI1 andAI2)

Digital Inputs(DI1 to DI4)

InterfaceRS-232 KCS-CFW08

InterfaceMIS-CFW08-RS

HMI-CFW08-PPOWER

CONTROL

POWER SUPPLIES ANDCONTROL / POWER

INTERFACES

"ECC3"CONTROL

BOARDWITH DSP

AnalogOutput(AO)

RelayOutput

(RL1 andRL2)

MotorUVW

Rsh1

RPC

Pre-Charge

Braking Resistor(optional)

BRDCR

PE

-UD VoltageFeedback

PE

or

or

RFI Filter

orInterface

MIP-CFW08-RP

HMI-CFW08-RP

DC Link Inductor(optional)

+UD

RS-485

CANopenor

DeviceNet

KRS-485

KFB-CO or KFB-DN

Page 25: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

26

CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATION

Product AppearanceBesides the internal electronics, also the exterrnal productappearance have changed, which are:- The frontal lettering on the plastic covers (formerly: line,now: CFW-08 vector inverter);- WEG logois now indicated onall accessories of theCFW-08line (keypad, communication modules etc).

Figure below makes a comparison:

2.3.1 Differences between theold line andthe new CFW-08

a) line b) CFW-08

Figure 2.4 a) b) - Comparison between line a CFW-08 appearance

Version of SoftwareThenew CFW-08 starts with Software Version V3.00. Thus,the software versions V1.xx and V2.xx are exclusive forline.Besides the inverter control has been implemented in aDSP (Digital Signal Processor), which enables a moresophisticated control with more parameters and functions.

This section aims at showing the differences between the oldline and the new CFW-08. The information below areaddressed to user that are used to line.

Table below shows the equivalence between the accessoriesof the old line an the new CFW-08.

AcessoriyLocal Keypad (parallel)Remote serial KeypadRemote parallel KeypadInterface for remote serial KeypadInterface for remoteparallel KeypadInterfaces for serial communicationRS-232Interface for RS-485serial communication RS-485

lineIHM-8P (417100258)IHM-8R (417100244)

-MIR-8R (417100259)

-

MCW-01 (417100252)

MCW-02 (417100253)

CFW-08HMI-CFW08-P(417118200)

HMI-CFW08-RS (417118218)HMI-CFW08-RP(417118217)MIS-CFW08-RS (417118219)MIP-CFW08-RP(417118216)

KCS-CFW08(417118212)

KRS-485-CFW08(417118213)

Table 2.1 – Options for the mline and equivalents for the new CFW-08.

Page 26: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

27

CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATION

I/ODigital Inputs (*)Analog Input(s)Analog Outputs

Relay Outputs

line41-

1 (REVcontatct)

CFW-0841-

1 (REVcontact)

CFW-08 Plus421

2 (1 NO contact,1 NC contact)

AccessoriesWith the migration from the 16 bits microcontroller to theDSP of thenewCFW-08, the power supply of the electroniccircuits was changed from 5V to 3.3V. Consequently, theaccesories (keypads, communication modules, etc) of theold line CAN NOT BE USED with the new CFW-08 line.As general rule, use only accessories with WEG logo, asalready informed above.

Expansion of the Power RangeThe power range of the old line (0.25-2HP) has beenexpanded to (0.25 to 20)HP with the new CFW-08 line.

Control ModesOnly the CFW-08 line has:- Voltage Vector Control (VVC) that improves the inverter

performance considerably - adding theparameters P178,P399, P400, P402, P403, P404, P407, P408 and P409;

- The quadratic curve V/F improves the systema energysaving capability when loads with quadratic torque xspeed characteristics are driven, like pumps and fans.

Frequency ResolutionThe new CFW-08 has a frequency resolution 10 timeshigher than the oldline, i.e., it has a resoltion of 0.01Hz forfrequencies up to 100.0Hz and of 0.1Hz for frequencieshigher than 99.99Hz.

Switching Frequencies of 10kHz and 15kHzWhen the new CFW-08 is used, one can set the inverterswitching frequency to 10kHz and 15kHz, which enablesan extremly quiet operation.The audible noise level generated by the motor with 10 kHzis lower with the CFW-08, when compared with the line.This is due to the PWM modulation improvements of theCFW-08.

Inputs and Outputs (I/Os)The CFW-08 Plus line has more I/Os than the old line,while the CFW-08 is equivalent to theline in terms of I/Os.See table below:

(*) Two additional digital inputs are available when the digital inputs are used. (See

Parameter P235 and P239).

Table 2.2 – Number of digital inputs on the mline,on CFW08 and on the CFW08 Plus.

Page 27: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

28

CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATION

Parameters and Functions:

Parameters that are already used inline but have beenchangeda) P136 - Manual Torque Boost (IxR Compensation):

Besides the parameter name, also the way the userenters the IxR compensation value has been changed.In the old line, the parameter P136 had a family of 10curves (value range: 0 to 9). In the new CFW-08, the IxRCompensation is set by entering a percent (relating tothe input voltage) that defines the output voltage for anoutput frequency equal to zero. So larger curve set anda larger variation range is obtained.

Table below shows the equivalence between which wasprogrammed in the old line and which must beprogrammed in the new CFW-08 to obtain the sameresult.

But thecontrol connections (terminals XC1) differ betweenthe line and the CFW-08 line. Table below shows thesespin differences:

I/ODigital Input DI1Digital Input DI2Digital Input DI3Digital Input DI40V for Digital Inputs+10VAnalog Input AI1 -voltage signalAnalog Input AI1 -current signal orPTC input0V for analoginput(s)Analog Input AI2 -voltage signalAnalog Input AI2 -current signal orPTC inputAnalog Output AOCurrent signalAnalog Output AOCurrent signalRelay Ouput RL1

Relay Output RL2

line1234567

9

8

notavailable

notavailable

notavailablel

notavailablel

10(N.C.),11(C)and 12(N.O.)

notavailable

CFW-08123457

6 with switchS1:3 at pos. OFF

6 with switchS1:3 at pos. ON

5

notavailable

notavailable

notavailablel

notavailablel

10(N.C.),11(C)and 12 (N.O.)

notavailable

CFW-08 Plus123457

6 with switch S1:3at position OFF

6 with switch S1:3at position ON

5

8 with switch S1:4at position OFF

8 with switch S1:4at position ON

9 with switch S1:2to position ON

9 with switch S1:2to position OFF

11-12 (N.O.)

10-11 (N.C.)

Table 2.3 – Differences between the control pin location on the mline, theline CFW08 and on the CFW08 Plus.

Page 28: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

29

CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATION

b) Automatic Torque Boost (Automatic IxR Compensation)and Slip Compensation:

In thelineonly the rated motor current (P401) was usedin the Automatic IxR Compensation and the SlipCompensation functions. In the line the rated motorpower factor of the motor was considered as a fixedvalue and equal to 0.9.Now in the new CFW-08, areused theparameters P401and P407 (rated motor power factor). Thus:

Example:When in an application with theline the following setting wasrequired: P401=3.8A, now with the new CFW-08 you mustperform the following setting:

P401=3.8A and P407=0.9 or

P407= rated cos of the used motor and P401=3.8 x 0.9P407

c) Quick Inputs:

In the new CFW-08, the response time of the the digitalinputs is 10ms (max.).In addition, the minimum acceleration and decelerationtime was reduced from 0.2s (line) to 0.1s (CFW-08).Besides the DC braking process can be interruptedbefore it has been concluded, for instance, when a newenabling is required.

d) Other changes:

P120=2 - digital reference backupviaP121 independentlyof the reference source.P265=14 - DI3: multispeed using ramp 2.

P136 set in line0123456789

P136 to be set in the CFW-080.02.55.07.5

10.012.515.017.520.022.5

Table 2.4 – Equivalent values in the P136 programming forthe old mline and the new CFW08

P401line

. 0.9 = P401 x P407CFW-08

Page 29: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

30

CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATION

New Parameters and Functions:

The reference 1 of the multispeed that was in ParameterP121 (in line) is now in Parameter P124 (in CFW-08).

The DC link regulation level (ramp holding) can now beprogrammed in Parameter P151 - in theline this level wasfixed to 377V for the 200-240V line and 747V for the380-480V line.

Also the programming way of parameter P302 haschanged. In the line P302 was related to the voltageapplied to the output during the DC braking, now in the newCFW-08, P302 defines the DC Braking Current.

PID regulator.

Suammarizing, the new parameters are: P009, P040,P124, P151, P178, P202, P203, P205, P219, P238, P239,P240, P251, P252, P279, P399, P400, P402, P403, P404,P407, P408, P409, P520, P521, P522, P525, P526, P527,P528 and P536.

Page 30: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

31

CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATION

Figure 2.5 - Description and location of the nameplates on the CFW-08

2.4 CFW-08 IDENTIFICATIONSoftwareVersion

HardwareRevision

Rated Input Data(Voltage, Number ofPhases Current, Frequency)

Manufacturing DateWEG Part NumberSerial Number

CFW-08 Model

Rated Output Data(Voltage, Frequency)

Lateral label of the CFW-08

Frontal Nameplate of the CFW-08 (under the keypad)

Note: To remove thekeypad, seeinstructionsin 8.1.1 (Figure 8.2).

WEG Part NumberSeriel Number

CFW-08 ModelManufacturing DateHardware Revision

Software Version

Certification Stiker

Page 31: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

32

CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATIONC

FW-0

800

40B

2024

EO

__

__

__

__

__

__

Z

Rat

edO

utpu

tC

urre

ntf

or

220

a2

40V:

0016

=1.6

A00

26=2

.6A

0040

=4.0

A00

70=7

.0A

0073

=7.3

A0

100=

10A

016

0=16

A0

220=

22A

028

0=28

A0

330=

33A

380

a4

80V:

0010

=1.0

A00

16=1

.6A

0026

=2.6

A00

27=2

.7A

0040

=4.0

A00

43=4

.3A

0065

=6.5

A0

100=

10A

013

0=13

A0

160=

16A

024

0=24

A0

300=

30A

Num

ber

ofph

ases

of

the

pow

ersu

pply

:

S=si

ngle

phas

eT=

thre

eph

ase

B=si

ngle

phas

eor

thre

eph

ase

Man

ual

Lan

guag

e:

P=

Por

tug.

E=

Eng

lish

S=

Span

ish

Pow

er

Sup

ply:

2024

=(2

00to

240)

V38

48=

(380

to48

0)V

Opt

ions

:

S=st

anda

rdO

=w

ithop

tiion

s

Deg

ree

ofPr

otec

tion:

Blan

k=

stan

dar

dN

1=N

ema

1

Hum

anM

achi

neIn

terf

ace:

Bla

nk=

stan

dard

SI=

with

out

inte

rfac

e(w

ithdu

mm

ypa

nel)

WE

GS

erie

s0

8F

requ

ency

Inve

rter

Con

trol

Boa

rd:

Blan

k=

sta

ndar

dco

ntro

lA1

=co

ntro

l1(P

lus

Ver

sio

n)A2

=co

ntro

l2(P

lus

Ver

sion

with

Als

+/-

10V)

A3=c

ont

rol

boar

d3

(Plu

sve

rsio

nw

ithth

eC

ANo

pen

prot

oco

l)*1

A4=c

ont

rol

boar

d4

(Plu

sve

rsio

nw

ithth

eD

evic

eNet

prot

oco

l)*1

Spec

ial

Sof

twar

e:

Bla

nk=

none

End

Cod

eR

FIF

ilter:

Bla

nk=

with

out

filte

rFA

=C

lass

AR

FIfi

lter

(inte

rna

lor

foot

prin

t)

Spe

cial

Ha

rdw

are:

Bla

nk=

non

e

HO

WTO

SPEC

IFY

THE

CFW

-08

MO

DE

L:

NO

TES

!Th

eop

tion

field

(Sor

O)d

efin

esif

the

CFW

-08

isa

stan

dard

vers

ion

orif

itw

illbe

equi

pped

with

any

optio

nald

evic

es.I

fthe

stan

dard

vers

ion

isre

quire

d,th

esp

ecific

atio

nco

deen

dshe

re.

The

mod

elnu

mbe

rhas

alw

ays

the

lette

rZat

the

end.

Fore

xam

ple:

CFW

0800

40S

2024

ESZ

=st

anda

rd4.

0AC

FW-0

8in

verte

r,si

ngle

-pha

seat

(200

to24

0)V

inpu

t,w

ithm

anua

linE

nglis

h.

Ifth

eC

FW-0

8is

equi

pped

with

any

optio

nald

evic

es,y

oum

ustf

illou

tallf

ield

sin

the

corr

ects

eque

nce

upto

the

last

optio

nal

devi

ce,t

hem

odel

num

beri

sco

mpl

eted

with

the

lette

rZ.

Thus

,for

inst

ance

ifth

epr

oduc

tabo

veis

requ

ired

with

NE

MA

1de

gree

ofpr

otec

tion:

CFW

0800

40S

2024

EON

1Z=

CFW

-08

inve

rter,

4A,

sing

le-p

hase

,200

-240

Vin

put,

with

man

uali

nEn

glis

hla

ngua

gean

dw

ithki

tfor

NE

MA

1de

gree

ofpr

otec

tion.

*1-T

heve

rsio

nsA

3an

dA4

ofth

eco

ntro

lboa

rdsh

allb

eus

edo

nlyw

ithth

eKF

B-C

O-C

FW0

8an

dwi

thth

eK

FB-D

N-C

FW08

,re

spe

ctiv

ely

(ref

erto

item

8.12

and

8.1

3).

The

para

llelk

eypa

d,th

ese

rialr

emot

eke

ypad

,the

para

llel

rem

ote

keyp

ad,

and

the

seria

lpr

otoc

ol(M

odbu

san

dW

EG)

cann

otbe

used

with

thes

eve

rsio

nsof

the

cont

rolb

oard

.

Page 32: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

33

CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATION

For the effect of this code, the standard product is conceivedas follows:

- CFW-08 with standard control board.- Degree of protection:NEMA 1 for the models 22A, 28Aand 33A/ 200-400V and too 13A,16A, 24A and too30A/380-480V;IP20 for the other models.

CFW-08 Plus - A1 is composed of the drive and the controlboard A1. Example: CFW080040S2024POA1Z.

CFW-08 Plus - A2 is composed of the drive and the controlboard A2. Example: CFW-080040S2024POA2Z. Thesemodels are factory set for bipolar analog inputs (-10V to+10V).This configuration is lost when the factory default parametersare loaded (P204 = 5). Refer to the detailed description ofparameters P204 and P235 for further information.

CFW-08 Plus - A3 is composed of the drive, the KFB-CO-CFW-08 kit and the CANopen communication protocol.Example: CFW-080040S2024POA3Z.

CFW-08 Plus - A4 is composed of the drive, the KFB-DW-CFW-08 kit and the eviceNet communication protocol.Example: CFW-080040S2024POA4Z.

7.0A, 16.0A, 22A, 28A and 33A /200-240V and for all 380-480Vmodels arejust availablewith three-phasepower supply.

A RFI Class A filter (optional) can be installed inside theinverter in models 7.3 and 10A/200-240V (single-phase)and 2.7A, 4.3A, 6.5A, 10A, 13A, 16A, 24A and 30A/380-480V. Models 1.6A, 2.6A and 4.0A/200-240V (single-phase) and 1.0A, 1.6A, 2.6A and 4.0A/380-480V can beprovided mounted on a footprint RFI Class Afilter (optional).

The listing of the existing models (voltage/current) is shownin item 9.1.

Page 33: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

34

CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATION

The CFW-08 is supplied in cardboard boxes.The outside of the packing boxhas anameplate that is identicalto that on the CFW-08.Please check if the CFW-08 is the one you ordered.Check if the:

CFW-08 nameplate data matches with your purchase order.

The equipment has not been damaged during transport.

If any problem is detected, contact the carrier immedately.If the CFW-08 is not installed immediately, store it in a cleanand dry room (storage temperatures between –25°C and60°C). Cover it to protect it against dust, dirt or othercontamination.

ATENTION!When the drive is stored for a long time, it is recommended topower the drive up and keep it running for 1 hour every year.Make sure to use a power supply with the followingcharacteristics for all models (200-240V or 380-480V): 220V,single-phase or three-phase, 50 or 60Hz (for three-phasepower supply), without connecting the motor to the drive output.After powering up the drive, keep it off for 24 hours beforeusing it again.

2.5 RECEIVINGANDSTORING

Page 34: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

35

CHAPTER 3

INSTALLATION

This chapter describes the procedures for the electrical andmechanical installation of the CFW-08. These guidelinesand suggestions must be followed for proper CFW-08operation.

A The location of the inverter installation is an important factorto assure good performance and long useful life for itscomponents. For proper installation, we make the followingrecommendations:

Avoid direct exposure to sunlight, rain, high moisture andsea air;Avoid exposure to gases or explosive or corrosive liquids;Avoid exposure to excessive vibration, dust, oil or anyconductive particles in the air;

Environment conditions:

Temperature: 0 to 40ºC (32 to 104ºF ) - nominal conditions.From 0 to 50ºC (32 to 122ºF) - with 2% current derating foreach 1ºC (1.8ºF) degree above 40ºC(104ºF).Relative Air Humidity: 5% to 90% - non-condensing.MaximumAltitude: 1000m (3,300 ft) - nominal conditions.From 1000 to 4000m (3,300 to13,200 ft) - with 1% currentreduction for each 100m (330ft ) above 1000m (3,300ft).Pollution Degree: 2 (according to EN50178 and UL508C)

The Figure 3.1 and the table 3.1, provides external mountingspecifications, and external fixing holes of the do CFW-08.

3.1 MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

3.1.1 Environment

3.1.2 Mounting Specifications -CFW-08

Page 35: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

36

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

Figure 3.1 – CFW-08 Mounting Specifications

VIEW OF THEMOUNTING BASE

FRONTALVIEW

LATERAL VIEW

1 MIN. APÓS A DESENERGIZAÇÃO.- SOMENTE REMOVA A TAMPA

- L EIA O MANUAL DE INSTRUÇÕES.ATENÇÃO

- READ THE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.

AFTER 1 MIN. POWER HAS BEEN- ONLY REMOVE TERMINAL COVERWARNING

DISCONNECTED.

Page 36: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

37

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

InverterModel

1.6A / 200-240V

2.6A / 200-240V

4.0A / 200-240V

7.0A / 200-240V

7.3A / 200-240V

10A / 200-240V

16A / 200-240V

22A/200-240V

28A/200-240V

33A/200-240V

1.0A / 380-480V

1.6A / 380-480V

2.6A / 380-480V

2.7A / 380-480V

4.0A / 380-480V

4.3A / 380-480V

6.5A / 380-480V

10A / 380-480V

13A / 380-480V

16A / 380-480V

24A/380-480V

30A/380-480V

Width Lmm(in)75

(2.95)75

(2.95)75

(2.95)75

(2.95)115

(4.53)115

(4.53)115

(4.53)143

(5.63)182

(7.16)182

(7.16)75

(2.95)75

(2.95)75

(2.95)115

(4.53)75

(2.95)115

(4.53)115

(4.53)115

(4.53)143

(5.63)143

(5.63)182

(7.16)182

(7.16)

Height Hmm(in)151

(5.95)151

(5.95)151

(5.95)151

(5.95)200

(7.87)200

(7.87)200

(7.87)203

(7.99)290

(11.41)290

(11.41)151

(5.95)151

(5.95)151

(5.95)200

(7.87)151

(5.95)200

(7.87)200

(7.87)200

(7.87)203

(7.99)203

(7.99)290

(11.41)290

(11.41)

Depth Pmm(in)131

(5.16)131

(5.16)131

(5.16)131

(5.16)150

(5.91)150

(5.91)150

(5.91)165

(6.50)196

(7.71)196

(7.71)131

(5.16)131

(5.16)131

(5.16)150

(5.91)131

(5.16)150

(5.91)150

(5.91)150

(5.91)165

(6.50)165

(6.50)196

(7.71)196

(7.71)

Amm(in)64

(2.52)64

(2.52)64

(2.52)64

(2.52)101

(3.98)101

(3.98)101

(3.98)121

(4.76)161

(6.33)161

(6.33)64

(2.52)64

(2.52)64

(2.52)101

(3.98)64

(2.52)101

(3.98)101

(3.98)101

(3.98)121

(4.76)121

(4.76)161

(6.33)161

(6.33)

Bmm(in)129

(5.08)129

(5.08)129

(5.08)129

(5.08)177

(6.97)177

(6.97)177

(6.97)180

(7.08)260

(10.23)260

(10.23)129

(5.08)129

(5.08)129

(5.08)177

(6.97)129

(5.08)177

(6.97)177

(6.97)177

(6.97)180

(7.09)180

(7.09)260

(10.23)260

(10.23)

Cmm(in)5

(0.20)5

(0.20)5

(0.20)5

(0.20)7

(0.28)7

(0.28)7

(0.28)11

(0.43)11

(0.43)11

(0.43)5

(0.20)5

(0.20)5

(0.20)7

(0.28)5

(0.20)7

(0.28)7

(0.28)7

(0.28)11

(0.43)11

(0.43)11

(0.43)11

(0.43)

Dmm(in)6

(0.24)6

(0.24)6

(0.24)6

(0.24)5

(0.20)5

(0.20)5

(0.20)10

(0.39)10

(0.39)10

(0.39)6

(0.24)6

(0.24)6

(0.24)5

(0.20)6

(0.24)5

(0.20)5

(0.20)5

(0.20)10

(0.39)10

(0.39)10

(0.39)10

(0.39)

MountingScrew

M4(5/32)

M4(5/32)

M4(5/32)

M4(5/32)

M4(5/32)

M4(5/32)

M4(5/32)

M5(3/16)

M5(3/16)

M5(3/16)

M4(5/32)

M4(5/32)

M4(5/32)

M4(5/32)

M4(5/32)

M4(5/32)

M4(5/32)

M4(5/32)

M5(3/16)

M5(3/16)

M5(3/16)

M5(3/16)

Weigthkg(lb)

1.0(2.2)1.0

(2.2)1.0

(2.2)1.0

(2.2)2.0

(4.4)2.0

(4.4)2.0

(4.4)2.5

(9.8)6

(2.36)6

(2.36)1.0

(2.2)1.0

(2.2)1.0

(2.2)2.0

(4.4)1.0

(2.2)2.0

(4.4)2.0

(4.4)2.0

(4.4)2.5

(5.5)2.5

(5.5)6

(2.36)6

(2.36)

Degree ofProtection

IP20 / NEMA1

IP20 / NEMA1

IP20 / NEMA1

IP20 / NEMA1

IP20 / NEMA1

IP20 / NEMA1

IP20 / NEMA1

IP20/NEMA1

IP20/NEMA1

IP20/NEMA1

IP20 / NEMA1

IP20 / NEMA1

IP20 / NEMA1

IP20 / NEMA1

IP20 / NEMA1

IP20 / NEMA1

IP20 / NEMA1

IP20 / NEMA1

IP20 / NEMA1

IP20 / NEMA1

IP20 / NEMA1

IP20 / NEMA1

Dimensions Fixing base

Table 3.1 – CFW-08 dimensions for mechanical installation of the several models.

* These models are NEMA1 only with the KN1_CFW-08_MX optional.

Page 37: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

38

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

When installing the CFW-08, allow free space around the in-verter as indicated in Figure 3.2. Table 3.2 shows the requiredfree spaces.

Install the inverter in vertical position as described below.

1) Install the inverter on a flat surface.2) Do not install heat sensitive components immediately abovethe inverter.

ATTENTION!When inverters are installed side by side, maintain theminimum recommended distance B.when inverters are installed top and bottom, maintain theminimum recommended distance A + C and deflect the hotair coming from the inverter below.

ATTENTION!Provide independent conduits for signal, control and powerconductors. (Refer to Electrical Installation).

Use separate conduits or trunking for control and power wiring(see item 3.2 - Electrical Installation).

3.1.3 Positioning and Fixing

Figure 3.2 – Free spaces for cooling

Page 38: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

39

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

CFW-08 Model1,6A / 200-240V2,6A / 200-240V4,0A / 200-240V7,0A / 200-240V1,0A / 380-480V1,6A / 380-480V2,6A / 380-480V4,0A / 380-480V7,3A / 200-240V10A / 200-240V16A / 200-240V2,7A / 380-480V4,3A / 380-480V6,5A / 380-480V10A / 380-480V22A / 200-240V13A / 380-480V16A / 380-480V28A/200-240V33A/200-240V24A/380-480V30A/380-480V

A B C D

30 mm 1,18 in 5 mm 0,20 in 50 mm 2 in 50 mm 2 in

35 mm 1,38 in 15 mm 0,59 in 50 mm 2 in 50 mm 2 in

40 mm 1,57 in 30 mm 1,18 in 50 mm 2 in 50 mm 2 in

50 mm 2 in 40 mm 1,57 in 60 mm 2,36 in 50mm 2 in

Table 3.2 – Recommended free spaces

When inverters are installed inside closed metallic panels orboxes provide suitable air exhaustion by ensuring that theambient temperature remains within the allowed range. ForWatt losses refer to Item 9.1 of this Manual.For reference, table 3.3 shows the cooling airflow for eachinverter model.

Inverter Cooling Method: Internal fan, flow direction fromthe bottom to the top.

3.1.3.1 Panel Mounting

CFW-08 Inverter Model CFM I/s m3/min4.0A, 7.0A/200V2.6A, 4.0A/400V

6.0 2.8 0.17

7.3A, 10A, 16A/200V6.5A, 10A/400V

18.0 8.5 0.51

13A, 16A/400V 18.0 8.5 0.5122A/200V 22.0 10.4 0.6228A/200V24A/400V

36.0 17.0 1.02

33A/200V30A/400V

44.0 20.8 1.25

Table 3.3 – CoolingAir Flow requirements

Page 39: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

40

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

3.1.3.2 Surface Mounting Figure 3.3 shows the surface installation procedures of theCFW-08.

Figure 3.3 – Mounting procedures for CFW-08

AIR FLUX

3.2 ELECTRICALINSTALLATION

DANGER!The information below will be a guide to achieve a properinstallation. Follow also all applicable local standards forelectrical installations.

DANGER!Be sure the AC input power has been disconnected beforemaking any terminal connection.

DANGER!Do not use the CFW08 as an emergency stop device. Forthis purpose provide other additional mechanical means.

The power connection terminals can be of different sizes andconfigurations, depending on the inverter model, as shown inFigure 3.4.

Description of the Power Terminals:

L/L1, N/L2 and L3 (R, S ,T): AC Power supply.The models of the line voltage 200-240 V (excepting 7,0A,16A, 22A, 28A, and 33A) can be operated on two phases(single-phaseoperation) without rated current reduction. Inthis case the AC power supply can be connected to any 2terminals of the 3 inputs terminals.U, V, W: Connection to the motor.

3.2.1 Power / GroundingTerminals

Page 40: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

41

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

-UD: negative pole of the DC link circuit is not available onthe models 1,6A-2,6A-4,0A-7,0A/200-240V and models1,0A-1,6A-2,6A-4,0A/380-480V. It is used when the inver-ter supplied by CD voltage (with the terminal +UD). To avoidwrong connection of the braking resistor (mounted externaldo the inverter), the inverter is factory delivered with a rubberplug which must be removed when the use of the -UD ter-minal is required.BR: Connection for the braking resistor.Not available on the models 1,6A-2,6A-4,0A-7,0A/200-240V and on the models 1,0A-1,6A-2,6A-4,0A/380-480V.+UD: positive pole of the DC link circuit, not available onthe models 1,6A-2,6A-4,0A-7,0A/200-240V and on themodels 1,0A-1,6A-2,6A-4,0A/380-480V. It is used toconnect thebarking resistor (with the–UD terminal) or whenthe inverter shall be supplied by with DC voltage (jointlywith the –UD terminal.DCR: Connection for the external DC link circuit inductor(optional). It is only available on the models 28A and 33A/200-240V and on the models 24A and 30A/380-480V.

c) 22A/200-240V and 13-16A/380-480V Models

1R

2S

3T

4U

5V

6W

7-UD

8BR

9+UD

LINE MOTOR

b) 7,3-10-16A/200-240V and 2,7-4,3-6,5-10A/380-480V Models

-Ud BR +UdL3L/L1 N/L2 U V W

a) 1,6-2,6-4,0-7,0A/200-240V and 1,0-1,6-2,6-4,0A/380-480V Models

L3 U V WL/L1 N/L2

Figure 3.4 a) to c) - Power terminals

Page 41: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

42

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.2 Location of the PowerTerminals, GroundingTerminals and ControlTerminal Connections

Control XC1

Power

Grounding

a) 1,6-2,6-4,0-7,0-7,3-10-16A/200-240V and1,0-1,6-2,6-2,7-4,0-4,3-6,5-10A/380-480V Models

Figure 3.5 a) b) – Location of the Power, grounding andcontrol connections

b) 22-28-33A/200-240V and 13-16-24-30A/380-480V Models

Control XC1

Power

Grounding

Figure 3.4 cont. d) - Power terminals

d) 28-33A/200-240V and 24-30A/380-480V Models

1R

2S

3T

4U

5V

6W

7-UD

8BR

9+UD

LINE MOTOR

10DCR

Page 42: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

43

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

Circuit BreakerRated InverterCurrent

[A]

PowerCables[mm

2]

GroundingWiring[mm

2]

MaximumPowerCable[mm

2]

MaximumGrounding

Wiring[mm

2] Current

WEGModel

1,0 1,5 2,5 2,5 4,0 1,6 MPW25-1,61,6 (200-240V) 1,5 2,5 4,0 4,0 5,5 MPW25-6,31,6 (380-480V) 1,5 2,5 2,5 4,0 2,5 MPW25-2,52,6 (200-240V) 1,5 2,5 4,0 4,0 9,0 MPW25-102,6 (380-480V) 1,5 2,5 2,5 4,0 4,0 MPW25-4,0

2,7 1,5 2,5 4,0 4,0 4,0 MPW25-4,04,0 (200-240V) 1,5 2,5 4,0 4,0 13,5 MPW25-164,0 (380-480V) 1,5 2,5 2,5 4,0 6,3 MPW25-6,3

4,3 1,5 2,5 4,0 4,0 6,3 MPW25-6,36,5 2,5 4,0 4,0 4,0 10 MPW25-107,0 2,5 4,0 4,0 4,0 12 MPW25-167,3 4,0 4,0 4,0 4,0 25 MPW25-25

10,0 (200-240V) 4,0 4,0 4,0 4,0 32 MPW25-3210,0 (380-480V) 4,0 4,0 4,0 4,0 16 MPW25-16

13,0 4,0 4,0 4,0 4,0 20 MPW25-2016,0 4,0 4,0 4,0 4,0 25 MPW25-2522,0 4,0 4,0 4,0 4,0 40 DW125H-4024,0 4,0 4,0 10,0 6,0 44 DW125H-4028,0 6,0 6,0 10,0 6,0 50 DW125H-5030,0 6,0 6,0 10,0 6,0 50 DW125H-5033,0 6,0 6,0 10,0 6,0 63 DW125H-63

Table 3.4 – Recommended wiring and circuit-breakers – use only copper wire (70ºC).

NOTE!The wire sizing in Table 3.4 shall be used as reference valuesonly. The exact wire sizing depends on the installationconditions and the maximum acceptable line voltage drop.

The recommended tightening torque is shown in table 3.5.

3.2.3 Wiring and Circuit-Breakers for the Powerand GroundingConnections.

ATTENTION!Install the inverter and power cables distant from sensitiveequipment and wirings by 0,25m, for instance PLCs,temperature controllers, thermocouple cables, etc.

Use the recommended wire cross section and circuit breakersas shown in Table 3.3. Use only copper wire (70ºC).

ATTENTION!The use of mini circuit breakers (MBU) is not recommendeddue to the level of the magnetic protection.

Page 43: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

44

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

Model

1,6A / 200-240V2,6A / 200-240V4,0A / 200-240V7,0A / 200-240V7,3A / 200-240V

10,0A / 200-240V16,0A / 200-240V22,0A / 200-240V28,0A / 200-240V33,0A / 200-240V1,0A / 380-480V1,6A / 380-480V2,6A / 380-480V2,7A / 380-480V4,0A / 380-480V4,3A / 380-480V6,5A / 380-480V

10,0A / 380-480V13,0A / 380-480V16,0A / 380-480V24,0A / 380-480V30,0A / 380-480V

Grounding WiringN.m Lbf.in0,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,340,5 4,34

Power CablesN.m Lbf.in1,0 8,681,0 8,681,0 8,681,0 8,68

1,76 15,621,76 15,621,76 15,621,76 15,621,76 15,621,76 15,621,2 10,01,2 10,01,2 10,0

1,76 15,621,2 10,0

1,76 15,621,76 15,621,76 15,621,76 15,621,76 15,621,76 15,621,76 15,62

Table 3.5 - Recommended tightening torque for power and grounding connections

3.2.4 Power Connections

a) 1,6-2,6-4,0-7,0A/200-240V and 1,0-1,6-2,6-4,0A/380-480V Models - Three Phase Power Supply

Type of Screwdriver forthe Power Terminal

Philips Number PH2Philips Number PH2Philips Number PH2Philips Number PH2Philips Number PH2Philips Number PH2Philips Number PH2Philips Number PH2PozidrivNumber PZ2PozidrivNumber PZ2Philips Number PH2Philips Number PH2Philips Number PH2Philips Number PH2Philips Number PH2Philips Number PH2Philips Number PH2Philips Number PH2Philips Number PH2Philips Number PH2PozidrivNumber PZ2PozidrivNumber PZ2

Figure 3.6 a) - Power and Grounding Connections

PE

RST

Power Supply Disconnect

PE

TQ1

R S T U V W PE

Shielding

PE W V U

Page 44: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

45

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

b) Models 7,3-10-16-22A/200-240V and 2,7-4,3-6,5-10-13-16A/380-480V - Three Phase Power Supply

Figure 3.6 b) c) - Power and Grounding Connections

Note: (*) In case of single-phase power supply with phase and neutral cable, connect only the phasecable to the disconnecting switch.

(*) In teh 1,6A -2,6A and 4,0A models, the terminals to connect the braking resistor are notavailable.

PE

RST

Power Supply

PE

TQ1

R S T U V W PE

Shielding

PE-Ud BR +Ud BrakingResistor

(see item 8.21)

Disconnect

W V U

PEPE

TQ1

R S T U V WPE

Shielding

PE-Ud BR +Ud BrakingResistor (**)

(see item 8.21)

Disconnect (*)

W V U

Phase

Neutral

c) Models 1,6-2,6-4,0-7,3-10A / 200-240V - Single Phase Power Supply

Power Supply

Page 45: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

46

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

Figure 3.6 d) - Power and Grounding Connections

d) Models 28-33A / 200-240V and 24-30A / 380-480V - Three Phase Power Supply

DANGER!Provide an AC disconnecting switch to switch OFF the inputpower to the inverter. This device shall disconnect the inverterfrom the AC input supply when required (e. g. duringmaintenance services).

ATTENTION!The AC input for the inverter must have a grounded neutralconductor.

NOTE!TheAC input must be compatible with the inverter rated voltage

Power Supply Line Capacity:

The CFW-08 is suitable to be used in circuits which cannot supplymore than30.000A rms symmetrically (240/480V).If theCFW-08 is installed in networks which can supply morethan 30.000Arms, you must provide suitable protectioncircuits such as fuses and circuit breakers.

3.2.4.1 AC Input Connection

PE

TQ1

R S T U V WPE

Shielding

PE-Ud BR +Ud

Braking ResistorDisconnect

W V U

Phase

Power Supply

DCR DC LinkInductor

(Optional)PE

RST

Page 46: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

47

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.4.3 GroundingConnections

DC Link Inductor / Line Reactors

The requirements for use of line reactors depend on severalapplication factors. Refer to Section 8.19.

NOTE!Capacitors for power factor correction are not required at theinput (L/L1, N/L2, L3 or R, S, T) and they must not be connectedat theoutput (U, V, W).

The inverter is provided with electronic protection againstmotor overload. This protection must be set according to thespecific motor. When the same inverter drives several motors,use individual overload relays for each motor. Maintain theelectrical continuity of the motor cable shield.

ATTENTION!If a disconnect switch or a contactor is inserted in the motorsupply line, do not operate them with motor running or wheninverter is enabled. Maintain the electrical continuity of themotor cable shield.

Dynamic Braking (DB)

When inverters with dynamic braking (DB) are used, the DBresistor shall be mounted externally. Figure 8.29 shows howto connect the braking resistor. Size it according to theapplication, not exceeding the maximum current of the brakingcircuit. For the connection between inverter and the brakingresistor, use twisted cable. Provide physical separationbetween this cable and the signal and control cables. Whenthe DB resistor is mounted inside the panel, consider wattloss generated when the enclosure size and requiredventilation are calculated.

DANGER!The inverter must be grounded to a protective earth for safetypurposes (PE).The earth or ground connection must comply with the localregulations. For grounding, use cables with cross sections asindicated in Table 3.4. Make the ground connection to agrounding bar or to the general grounding point (resistance10 ohms).

DANGER!Do not share the ground wiring with other equipment thatoperates with high currents (for instance: high voltage motors,welding machines, etc). If several inverters are used together,refer to Figure 3.7.

3.2.4.2 OutputConnections

Page 47: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

48

CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATION

ATTENTION!The AC input for the inverter must have a grounded neutralconductor.

EMI – Electromagnetic Interference

When electromagnetic interference (EMI), generated by theinverter, interferes in the performanceof other equipment, useshielded wires, or install the motor wires in metallic conduits.Connect one end of the shielding to the inverter groundingpoint and the other end to the motor frame.

Motor Frame

Ground always ground the motor frame. Ground the motor inthe panel where the inverter is installed or ground it to theinverter. The inverter output wiring must be laid separately fromthe input wiring as well as from the control and signal cables.

NOTE!Do not use neutral conductor for grounding purposes.

Figure 3.7 – Grounding connections for more than one inverter.

GROUNDING BARINTERNAL TOTHE PANEL

Page 48: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

49

CHAPTER 2 - GENERAL INFORMATION

3.2.5 Control Wiring The control wiring (analog inputs/outputs, digital inputs andrelay outputs is made on the XC1 connector of control board(see location in Figure 3.5, Section 3.2.2). There are twoconfigurations for the control board: standard version(CFW-08 line) and Plus version (CFW-08 Plus line), as shownbelow:

Figure 3.8 - XC1 control terminal description (standard control board - CFW-08)

Note: Normally Closed Contact, NO= Normally Open Contact (See item 2.4)

XC1Terminal

1 DI1

2 DI2

3 DI3

4 DI4

5 GND

6AI1 orDI5 orPTC1

7 +10V89

10 N.C.

11 Commom

12 N.O.

DescriptionFactory Default Function

Digital Input 1General EnableDigital Input 2FWD / REVDigital Input 3ResetDigital Input 4

Start/Stop

0V ReferenceAnalog Input 1 or Digital Input 5or PTC Input

Frequency / Speed Reference(remote mode)

Potentiometer referenceNot UsedNot UsedRelay Output 1 - N.C. contactNot Fault (P277=7)Relay outputs common pointsRelay Output 1 - N.O. contact

No Fault (P277=7)

Specifications

4 Isolates digital inputs- Logic NPNMinimum high Level: 10VdcMaximum Low Level: 30VdcMaximum Low Level: 3Vdc- Logic PNPMaximum Low Level: 10VdcMinimum high Level: 21.5VdcMaximum high Level: 30VdcInput Current: -11mAMax. Input current: -20mANot connected to PE( 0 to10) Vdc (0 to20)mA(4 to20)mA(fig. 3.10)Impedance: 100k (voltage input) and500(current input).- Linearity error < 0,25%- Maximum voltage input: 30VdcFor further information refer to P235detailed parameter description+10Vdc, ± 5%, capacity: 2mA

Contact capacity:0.5A / 250Vac

Relay 1

10 12

11

CCW

CW

5k

Factory defaultsettings

Page 49: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

50

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

Figure 3.9 - Description of the XC1 connector for the control board A1 (CFW-08 Plus), control board A2(CFW-08 Plus with AI’s -10V a +10V), control board A3 (CFW-08 with CANopen protocol) and control

board A4 (CFW-08 with DeviceNet protocol). Refer to item 2.4 (CFW-08 identification)for additional information on the control boards.

ConnectorXC1

1 DI1

2 DI2

3 DI3

4 DI4

5 GND

6 AI1 orDI5 orPTC1

7 +10V

8AI2 orDI6 or

PTC

9 AO

10 N.C

11 Commom

12 N.O.

DescriptionFactory Default Function

Digital Input 1General EnableDigital Input 2FWD / REVDigital Input 3ResetDigital Input 4

Start/Stop

0V Reference

Analog Input1 or Digital Input 5or PTC1 Input

Frequency/Speed Reference(remote mode)

Potentiometer reference

Analog Input2 or Digital InputDigital 6 or PTC2 Input

Not Used

Analog output

Output Frequency (Fs)

Relay Output 2 - N.C. contactFs>Fx (P279=0)Relay outputs common pointsRelay Output 1 - N.O. contact

Not Fault (P277=7)

Specifications

4 Isolates digital inputs- Logic NPNMinimum high Level: 10VdcMaximum Low Level: 30VdcMaximum Low Level: 3Vdc- Logic PNPMaximum Low Level: 10VdcMinimum high Level: 21.5VdcMaximum high Level: 30VdcInput Current: -11mAMax. Input current: -20mA

Not connected to PE

(0 to10) Vdc (0 to 20)mA (4 to 20)mAand (-10 to +10)Vdc* (fig. 3.10)Impedance: 100k (voltage input) and500(current input).- Linearity error < 0,25%- Maximum voltage input: 30VdcFor further information refer to P235detailed parameter description+10Vdc, ± 5%, capacity: 2mA

(0 to10) Vdc (0 to 20)mA (4 to 20)mAand (-10 to +10)Vdc* (fig. 3.10)Impedance: 100k (voltage input) and500 (current input) - linearityerror< 0,25% Maximum voltage input:30Vdc For further information refer toP239 detailed parameter description

(0 to 10)Vdc, RL 10k Resolution: 8bitsLinearity Error < 0,25%

Contact capacity:0.5A / 250Vac

Relay1

11

Relay2

12 10

RPM

-

+

CCW

CW

CCW

CW

10

k

Note: NC=Normally Closed Contact, NO= Normally Open Contact (See item 2.4)* This option is available only for version A2 of the control board (see item 2.4). In version A2 the

linearity error is smaller than 0.50%.

10k

Factory defaultsettings

Page 50: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

51

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

AI1AODI

S1AI2

AI1

+ -

0 . . . 10V

X~20m A

12V

PELIGRO!!

- PODE CAUSAR CHOQUE OU

NP NFERIMENTO.

AODIPNP

XC5

ON

ERROR

S1

PERIGO!

P ERS ONAL INJURY.

- MAY CAUSE SHOCK OR

ELECTRICA O LES ION.- PUEDE CAUSAR DESCARGA

DANGER!

AI2

ATENÇÃO

WARNING- ONLY REMOVE TERMINAL COVE R

-S OMENTE RE MOVA A TA MPA

AFTE R1 MIN. POWER HA S BE EN

1 MIN.A PÓS A DESE NERGIZAÇÃO.

- LEIA O MANUAL DE INSTRUÇÕES.

- RE AD THE INSTRUCTIONS MANUAL.DISCONNECTE D.

ON

OFF

Figure 3.10 –Jumpers position for selecting the analog inputs and outputs operation mode (voltage - 0 to 10Vdcor current - 0 to 20mA / 4 to 20mA) as well as the digital inputs operation mode (high logic level - PNP or low

logic level - NPN). Refer to the digital inputs definition on items 3.2.5.1 and 3.2.5.2.

I/O

DI1 to DI4

AO

AI1

AI2

Factory Deafult Setting

See P263, P264, P265and P266

Output frequency

Frequency / Speed Reference(remote mode)

No function

DipSwitchS1:1

S1:2

S1.3

S1.4

Selection

OFF: Digital inputs as low active (NPN)ON: Digital inputs as high active (PNP)OFF: (0 to 10)VdcON: (4 to 20)mA or (0 to 20)mAOFF: (0 to 10)Vdc or DI5ON: (4 to 20)mA or (0 to 20)mA or PTCOFF: (0 to 10)Vdc or DI6ON: (4 to 20)mA or (0 to 20)mA or PTC

Table 3.6- Dip switch configuration

As a default, the analog inputs are set to voltage mode(0 to 10V)dc and the digital inputs are set to active (NPN logic).Change it by using dipswitch S1 on the control board and bysetting parameters P235, P239 and P253 (see Table 3.6).

NOTE!If it's used a (4 to20)mA signal, set parameter P235, P239and P253 that defines the signal type at AI1, AI2 and AOrespectively.The parameters related to the analog inputs are: P221,P222, P234, P235, P236, P238, P239, P240, P251, P252,P253. For more details, please refer to Chapter 6.

Page 51: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

52

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

Inverter sideInsulate with tape

Figure 3.11 - Shield connection

Connect to earth: bolts are located on heatsink

Do not ground

During the signal and control wire installation note please thefollowing:

1) Cable cross section: (0.5 to 1.5)mm²/(20 to 14) AWG

2) Max. Torque: 0.50 N.m (4.50 lbf.in).

3) XC1 wiring must connected with shielded cables andinstalled separately at a distance of 10 cm each other forlengths up to 100m and at distance of 25cm each other forlengths over 100m. If the crossing of these cables isunavoidable, install them perpendicular, maintaining amimimum separation distance of 5 cm (2 in) at the crossingpoint.

Connect the shield as shown below:

4) For wiring distances longer than 50 m ( 150 ft), it's necessaryto use galvanic isolators for the XC1:5 to 9 analog signals.

5) Relays, contactors, solenoids or eletromagnetic brakingcoils installed near inverters can generate interferences inthe control circuit. To eliminate this interference, connectRC suppressor in parallel with the coils of AC relays.Connect free-wheeling diode in case of DC relays.

6) When external keypad (HMI) is used (refer to Chapter 8),separete the cable that connects the keypad to the inverterfrom other cables, maintaining aminimum distanceof 10cm(4 in) between them.

7) When analog reference (AI1 or AI2) is used and thefrequency oscillates (problem caused byeletromagnetic interference) XC1:5 connect to the in-verter heatsink.

Page 52: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

53

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

3.2.5.1 Digital Inputs asLow Level Active(S1:1 to OFF)

Connector XC11 DI12 DI23 DI34 DI45 GND

b) Example using a PLC - NPN transistor Output

Connector XC11 DI12 DI23 DI34 DI45 GND

Figure 3.12 a) b) - Digital inputsas low logic level configuration.

PLC Output Relay

COM

PLC Output NPN GND (PLC)

Figure 3.13 - Equivalent Circuit – Digital Inputs as low logic level.

XC1:1

XC1:2

DI2

DI1

1

2

2k

2k 10V

10V

SMDOptocoupler

SMD

Optocoupler

+12V

S1:1 in OFF

In this option, the equivalent circuit at inverter side is:(See Figure 3.13)

This option can be selected when a PLC is used with relay ortransistor output is used (low logic level to activate the DI).

a) Example using a PLC relay - output

GND

Page 53: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

54

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

This option can be selected when a PLC is used with PNPtransistor output PNP (high logic level to activate the DI) orPLC with relay output is used. For this last alternative youmust apply an external power supply 24V +/- 10%.

3.2.5.2 Digital Input asHigh Level Active(S1:1 to ON)

Figure 3.14 a) b) – Configuration of the active digital inputs as highlogic level.

In this option, the equivalent circuit at the inverter side is:

Figure 3.15 – Equivalent Circuit - Digital Inputs as high logic level.

XC1:1

XC1:2

DI2

DI1

1

2

2k

10V

10V

SMDOptocoupler

SMDOptocoupler

+12V S1:1 in ON

b) Example using a PLC - PNP transistor Output

a) Example using a PLC relay - output

Connector XC11 DI12 DI23 DI34 DI45 GND

24V (internal PLC)

PLC outputPNP GND (PLC)

Conector XC11 DI12 DI23 DI34 DI45 GND

PLC Output RelayGND (SourceExternal 24V)

24V (external)

2k

Page 54: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

55

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

No

Func

tion

orG

ener

alE

nabl

ing

DI2

-FW

D/R

EV

DI3

-Res

et

CO

M

AI1

+10V

AI2

AO1

NC Com

mon

NO

DI4

-No

Func

tion

orS

tart

/Sto

p

S1: FWD / REV

S2: Reset

S3: Start / Stop

R1: Potentiometer forspeed setting

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

NOTES!The inverter is factory default programmed with the digitalinputs as low level active (S1:1 in OFF). When the digitalinputs are used as high level active, you must set the jumperS1:1 to ON.The jumper S1:1 selects the HIGH level or LOW level activefor all 4 digital inputs. You can not select them separately.

3.2.6 Typical TerminalConnections

Connection 1 - Keypad Start/Stop (Local Mode)

With the factory default programming, you can operate theinverter in local mode with the minimum connections shownin Figure 3.6 (Power) and without control connections. Thisoperation mode is recommended for users who are operatingthe inverter for the first time. Note that there is no need ofconnection of control terminals.For start-up according to this operation mode, refer toChapter 5.

Connection 2 - Wire Start/Stop (Remote Mode)

Valid for factory default programming and inverter operatingin remote mode. For the factory default programming, theselection of the operation mode (local/remote) is made viathe key (default is local).The figure below shows the inverter terminal connection forthis type of driving.

Figure 3.16 - XC1 wiring for connection 2

R1

S3S2S1

5k

Page 55: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

56

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

NOTE!For the proper operation of configuration 2, terminal 5 shallbe connected to terminal 1 (general enable).The frequency reference can be sent via AI1 analog input(as shown in figure above), via keypad HMI-CFW08-P, orvia any other source (as described of the parameters -P221 and P222).When a line fault occurs by using this type of connectionwith switch S3 at position "RUN", the motor will be enabledautomatically as soon asthe line is re-established.

Connection 3 - Wire Start/Stop

Function enabling (three wire control):Set DI1 to Start: P263=14Set DI2 to Stop: P264=14Set P229=1 (command via terminals) if you want the 3-wirecontrol in local mode.Set P230=1 (command via terminals) if you want the 3-wirecontrol in remote mode.

The Figure 3.17 below shows the connections at VFDterminals for this type of configuration.

S1: Start

S2: Stop

Figure 3.17 - XC1 wiring for connection 3

DI1

-Sta

rt(3

-wire

)

DI2

-Sto

p(3

-wire

)

DI3

COM

AI1

+10V

AI2

AO1

NC Com

mon

NODI4

-FW

D/R

EV

S2S1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Page 56: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

57

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

NOTE!S1 and S2 are push buttons, NO and NC contact,respectively.The speed reference can be via Analog Input AI1 (as inconnection 2), via keypad (HMI-CFW08-P), or via any othersource (as described of the parameter - P221 and P222).When a line fault occurs by using this connection with themotor running and the S1 and S2 switches are in originalposition (S1 openned and S2 closed), the inverter will notbe enabled automatically as soon as the line is re-restablished.The Start/Stop function is described in Chapter 6.

Connection 4 - FWD RUN / REV RUN

Parameter to be programmed:Set DI1 to Forward Run : P263 = 8Set DI2 to Reverse Run: P264 = 8Make sure the inverter commands are via terminals, i.e.,P229=1 to local mode or P230=1 to remote mode.The figure 3.18 below shows the inverter terminal connectionfor this type of driving.

Figure 3.18 - XC1 wiring for connection 4

S1 open: StopS1 closed: Forward Run

S2 open: StopS2 closed: Reverse Run

DI1

-For

war

dR

un

DI2

-Rev

erse

Run

DI3

CO

M

AI1

+10V

AI2 AO

1

NC Com

mon

NO

DI4

-No

Func

tion/

Star

t/Sto

p

S2S1

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

NOTE!For the proper operation of configuration 4, terminal 4 shallbe connected to terminal 5 (Start/Stop).The speed reference can be via Analog Input AI1 (as inconnection 2), viakeypad (HMI-CFW08-P), or via any othersource (see description of parameters P221 and P222 inChapter 6).When a line fault occurs, this connection with switch S1 orswitch S2 is closed, the motor will beenabled automaticallyas soon as the line is re-restablished.

Page 57: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

58

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

3.3 European EMCDirective - Requirementsfor ConformingInstallations

The CFW-08 inverter series was designed considering safetyand EMC (ElectroMagnetic Compatibility) aspects.The CFW-08 units do not have an intrinsic function untilconnected with other components (e. g. a motor). Therefore,the basic product is not CE marked for compliance with theEMC Directive. The end user takes personal responsibilityfor the EMC compliance of the whole installation. However,when installed according to the recommendations describedin the product manual and including the recommended filtersand EMC measures the CFW-08 fulfill all requirements of theEMC Directive (89/336/EEC) as defined by the EMC ProductStandard for Adjustable Speed Electrical Power DriveSystems EN61800-3.Compliance of the CFW-08 series is based on the testing ofthe representative models. ATechnical Construction File waschecked and approved by a Competent Body.

3.3.1 Installation Figure 3.19 below shows the EMC filters connection.

Figure 3.19 - EMC filters connection - general condition

OutputCM

ChokeTransformer

Ground Rod/Gridor Building SteelStructure

Metallic Cabinet (when required)

Protective Grounding - PE

Motor

PE

CFW - 08L2/N

L1/L

L3E

PE

XC11 to 12

U

Input CMChoke

Controling and Signal Wiring

V

W

PE

L1/L

L2/N

L3

ExternalInput RFI

Filter

L2

L1

L3E

Obs.: Single-phase input inverters use single-phase filters and only L1/L and L2/N are used.

The following items are required in order to have a conforminginstallation:

1) The motor cable must be armored, flexible armored orinstalled inside a metallic conduit or trunking with equivalentattenuation. Ground the screen/metallic conduit at both ends(inverter and motor).

2) Control (I/O) and signal wiring must be shielded or installedinside a metallic conduit or trunking with equivalentattenuation.

Page 58: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

59

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

3.3.2 Emission and ImmunityLevels Description

3) The inverter and the external filter must be mounted on acommon metallic back plate with a positive electrical bondand in close proximity to one another. Ensure that a goodelectrical connection is made between the heatsink (inver-ter) / frame (external filter) and the back plate.

4) The length of the wiring between filter and inverter must bekept as short as possible.

5) The cable’s shielding must be solidly connected to thecommon back plate, using a metal bracket.

6) Grounding as recommended in this manual.

7) Use short and thick earthing cable to earth the external filteror inverter. When an external filter is used, only use an earthcable at filter input - the inverter earth connection is done bythe metallic back plate.

8) Earth the back plate using a braid, as short as possible. Flatconductors (e.g. braids or brackets) have lower impedanceat high frequencies.

9) Use cable glands whenever possible.

EMC phenomenon

Emission:

Conducted emissions (mains terminaldisturbance voltage - freq band 150kHzto 30MHz)

Radiated emissions (electromagneticradiation disturbance - freq band30MHz to 1000MHz)Immunity:Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

Fast transient-burst

Conducted radio-frequencycommon mode

Surge

Radio-frequency electromagnetic field

Basic standardfor test method

IEC/EN61800-3

IEC 61000-4-2

IEC 61000-4-4

IEC 61000-4-6

IEC 61000-4-5

IEC 61000-4-3

Level

“First environment” (*1) unrestricted distribution (*3)Class B, or;“First environment” (*1) restricted distribution (*4.5)Class A1, or;“Second environment” (*2) unrestricted (*3.6)ClassA2.“First environment” (*1), restrited distribution (*4,5)“Second environment” (*2), restrited distribution (*3)

6kV contact discharge4kV/2.5kHz (capacitive clamp) input cable;2kV/5kHz control cables; 2kV/5kHz (capacitive clamp)motor cable; 1kV/5kHz (capacitive clamp) externalkeypad cable0.15 to 80MHz; 10V; 80% AM (1kHz) - motor controland remote Keypad cable 1.2/50s, 8/20s;1kV coupling line to line;2kV coupling line to earth

80 to 1000MHz; 10V/m; 80% AM (1kHz)

Table 3.7 – Specification of the Emission and Immunity levels

Page 59: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

60

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

Obs.:1) First environment: environment that includes domestic

premises. It also includes establishments directly connectedwithout intermediate transformers to a low-voltage powersupply network which supplies buildings used for domesticpurposes.

2) Second environment: environment that includes allestablishments other than those directly connected toa low-voltage power supply network which supplies buildings usedfor domestic purposes.

3) Unrestricted distribution: mode of sales distribution in whichthe supply of equipment is not dependent on the EMCcompetence of the customer or user for the application ofdrives.

4) Restricted distribution: mode of sales distribution in whichthe manufacturer restricts the supply of equipment tosuppliers, customers or users who separately or jointly havetechnical competence in the EMC requirements of theapplication of drives.

(source: these definitions were extracted from the productstandard IEC/EN61800-3 (1996) + A11 (2000))

5) For installation with inverters that complies class A1 (firstenvironment restricted distribution), note that this is aproduct of the restricted sales distribution class accordingto IEC/EN61800-3 (1996) + A11 (2000). In a domesticenvironment this product may cause radio interference inwhich case the user may be required to take adequatedmeasures.

6) For installation with inverters that complies classA2 (secondenvironment unrestricted distribution), note that this productis not intended to be used on a low-voltage public networkwhich supplies domestic premises. Radio frequencyinterference is expected if used on such a network.

Page 60: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

61

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

3.3.3 Inverter Models and Filters Table 3.8 below shows the inverter models and the respectiveRFI filter and the EMC class.A description of each EMC classis given in item 3.3.2. The characteristics of the footprint andexternal input RFI filters are given in item 3.3.4.

Id Inverter Model

1 CFW080016S2024 ... FAZ2 CFW080026S2024 ... FAZ3 CFW080040S2024 ... FAZ4 CFW080016B2024 ... FAZ

(single-phase input)5 CFW080026B2024 ... FAZ

(single-phase input)6 CFW080040B2024 ... FAZ

(single-phase input)7 CFW080073B2024 ... FAZ

(single-phase input)8 CFW080100B2024 ... FAZ

(single-phase input)9 CFW080016S2024 ...

10 CFW080026S2024 ...11 CFW080040S2024 ...12 CFW080016B2024 ...

(single-phase input)13 CFW080026B2024 ...

(single-phase input)14 CFW080040B2024 ...

(single-phase input)15 CFW080016B2024 ...

(three-phase input)16 CFW080026B2024 ...

(three -phase input)17 CFW080040B2024 ...

(three -phase input)18 CFW080070T2024 ...

19 CFW080073B2024 ...(single-phase input)

20 CFW080073B2024 ...(three-phase input)

21 CFW080100B2024 ...(single-phase input)

22 CFW080100B2024 ...(three-phase input)

23 CFW080160T2024 ...

24 CFW080010T3848 ... FAZ25 CFW080016T3848 ... FAZ26 CFW080026T3848 ... FAZ27 CFW080040T3848 ... FAZ28 CFW080027T3848 ... FAZ29 CFW080043T3848 ... FAZ30 CFW080065T3848 ... FAZ31 CFW080100T3848 ... FAZ32 CFW080130T3848 ... FAZ33 CFW080160T3848 ... FAZ

Input RFI Filter

Built-in filter[ FEX1-CFW08(footprint filter) ]

Built-in filter

FS6007-16-06(external filter)

FN3258-7-45(external filter)

FN3258-16-45(external filter)FS6007-25-08(external filter)FN3258-16-45(external filter)FS6007-36-08(external filter)FN3258-16-45(external filter)FN3258-30-47(external filter)

Built-in filter[ FEX2-CFW08(footprint filter) ]

Built-in filter

Conducted EmissionLevel

Class A1 or Class A2

Class B

Class A1 or Class A2

Radiated EmissionLevel

Class A2

Class A1

Class A2

Page 61: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

62

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

Observe the following notes for the models presented on table3.8:

NOTE!1)Class B drives (for conducted emission) shall be mounted

inside a metallic cabinet so that the radiated emissions staybelow the limits for residential applications (“firstenvironment”) and restricted distribution (refer to item 3.3.2).Class A1 drives (for conducted emission) do not requireinstallation inside metallic cabinets.Exception: models 7 and 8, that need to be mounted insidea cabinet to pass in the radiated emission test for secondenvironment and unrestricted distribution (see item 3.3.2).When a metallic cabinet is required, the maximum length ofthe remote keypad cable is 3m. In this case, the control (I/O) and signal wiring must be located inside the cabinet andthe remote keypad can be installed in the cabinet front door(see items 8.6.1 and 8.8).

2)The maximum switching frequency is 10kHz. Exception:5kHz for models 24 up to 33 and models 44 to 47.For Class A1 systems see also note 7.

3)The maximum motor cable length is 100m for models from46 and 47, 20m for models from 9 to 23, and from 34 to37,44 and 45, 10m for models from 1 to 8, 24 to 27 and 38to 43 and 5m for models from 28 to 33. For classA1 systemssee also note 7.

Id Inverter Model

34 CFW080010T3848 ...35 CFW080016T3848 ...36 CFW080026T3848 ...37 CFW080040T3848 ...38 CFW080027T3848 ...39 CFW080043T3848 ...40 CFW080065T3848 ...41 CFW080100T3848 ...

42 CFW080130T3848 ...

43 CFW080160T3848...

44 CFW080240T3848...

45 CFW080300T3848...

46 CFW080240T3848...FAZ47 CFW080300T3848...FAZ

Input RFI Filter

FN3258-7-45(external filter)

FN3258-16-45(external filter)

FN3258-30-47(external filter)FN-3258-30-47(external filter)FN-3258-55-52(external filter)

Built-in filter

Conducted EmissionLevel

Class B

Class B

Class A1

Class A2

Radiated EmissionLevel

Class A1

Class A2

Class A2

Table 3.8 - Inverter models list with filters and EMC category

Page 62: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

63

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

4)In models 28, 29, 30 and 31 (see also note 7), a CM chokeat inverter output is required: TOR1-CFW08, 1 turn. Thetoroid is mounted inside the N1 kit that is provided with thesemodels. For installation see figure 3.19.

5)In models from 38 to 43, a CM choke at filter input isrequired: TOR2-CFW08, 3 turns. For installation see figure3.19.

6)In models 38, 39, 40 and 41, it is required to use a shieldedcable between the external filter and the inverter.

7)Class A1 drives were also tested using the limits ofconducted emission for industrial applications (“secondenvironment”) and unrestricted distribution, i.e., Class A2(see notes 2 and 3 in item 3.3.2 for definitions).

In this case:- the maximum cable length is 30m for models from 1 to 8,

32 and 33 and 20m for models from 24 to 31;- themaximum switching frequency is 10kHz for models 28,

29, 30 and 31 and 5kHz for models from 1 to 8, 24 to 27,32 and 33;

- models 28, 29, 30 and 31 do not require any CM choke atinverter output (as stated in note 4).

FilterWEG Rated

WeightDimensions

DrawingsP/N Current (Width x Heightx Depth)

FEX1-CFW08 417118238 10A 0.6kg 79x190x51mm Fig. 3.20FEX2-CFW08 417118239 5AFS6007-16-06 0208.2072 16A 0.9kg 85.5x119x57.6mm Fig. 3.21FS6007-25-08 0208.2073 25A 1.0kg 85.5x119x57.6mm Fig. 3.22FS6007-36-08 0208.2074 36A 1.0kgFN3258-7-45 0208.2075 7A 0.5kg 40x190x70mm

Fig. 3.23FN3258-16-45 0208.2076 16A 0.8kg 45x250x70mmFN3258-30-47 0208.2077 30A 1.2kg 50x270x85mmFN3258-55-52 0208.2078 55A 1.8Kg 85x250x90mm

TOR1-CFW08 417100895 - 80g e=35mm, Fig. 3.24h=22mm

TOR2-CFW08 47100896 - 125g e=52mm, Fig. 3.25

h=22mm

Table 3.9 - EMC filters characteristics

3.3.4 EMC FiltersCharacteristics

Page 63: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

64

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

Figure 3.21 - FS6007-16-06 external filter drawing

Figure 3.20 a) b)- FEX1-CFW08 and FEX2-CFW08 footprint filter drawing

Type /05Fast-on terminal

6.3x 0.8mm

Front ViewLateral Right

View

Bottom View Terminal block forflexible and rigid cableof 4mm2 or AWG 10.Max. torque: 0.8Nm

a) Footprint Filter

Bottom View

Front ViewLateral Right View

b) Footprint Filter and Inverter

79 53

79

185 79

50

175

190

53

175

190

119

109

98.56.3x0.8

57.6

15.61.2

4.4

85.5

84.

566 51

3.7

40

Page 64: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

65

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

Figure 3.23 - FS3258-xx-xx external filter drawing

Figure 3.22 - FS6007-25-08 and FS6007-36-08 external filter drawing

Bolt type08=M4

119113

98.5

15.6

1.24.4

85.5

84.5

66 513.

7

40

P/N E

M4

57.6

Type/45Terminal block for 6mm2

solid cable,4mm2 flexible cable AWG 12.

Top ViewSide View

Connector

RatedCurrent

Type/47Terminal block for 16mm2

solid wires, 10mm2

flexible wires AWG 8.

Mechanical Data

Front View

A

E

I I

D

D

C

F

GH

41,8

19,

3

30,3

11,5

55,540,5

15

23,5

LineL1

L2L3

E

Page 65: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

66

CHAPTER 3 - INSTALLATION

Toroid:Thornton NT35/22/22-4100-IP12R(WEG P/N 0208.2102)

Plastic clamp: HellermannTyton NXR-18(WEG P/N 0504.0978)

Figure 3.24 - TOR1-CFW08 drawing

Toroid:Thornton NT52/32/20-4400-IP12E(WEG P/N 0208.2103)

Figure 3.25 - TOR2-CFW08 drawing

22

22

35

1.5

33.3 to 38.1

19.3

5.830

20

52 32

Page 66: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel
Page 67: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

68

KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION

This chapter describes the CFW-08 operation via standardkeypad or Human-Machine Interface (HMI), providing thefollowing information:

general keypad description (HMI);use of the keypad;parameter programming;description of the status indicators.

Thestandard CFW-08 keypad has a LED display with 4 digitsof 7 segments, 4 status LEDs and 8 keys. Figure 4.1 showsthe front view of the keypad and indicates the position of thedisplay and the status LEDs.

4.1 KEYPAD (HMI)DESCRIPTION

LED Display

GreenLed "Local"RedLed"Remote"

Led "FWD"Led "REV"

Figure 4.1 - CFW-08 standard keypad

Functions of the LED Display:The LED display shows the fault codes and drive status (seeQuick Parameter Reference, Fault and Status), the parameternumber and its value. For units of current, voltageor frequency,the LED display shows the unit in the right side digit [U=volts,A=ampères, ºC=Celsius Degree]

Functions of the “Local” and “Remote” LEDs:

Inverter in Local Mode:Green LED ON and red LED OFF.

Inverter in Remote Mode:Green LED OFF and red LED ON.

Functions of the FWD/REV LEDs - Direction of RotationRefer to Figure 4.2

CHAPTER 4

Page 68: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

69

CHAPTER 4 - KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION

Figure 4.2 - Direction of rotation (FWD/REV) LEDs

OFFONFLASHING

Basic Functions of the Keys:

Starts the inverter via acceleration ramp.

Stops (disables) the inverter via deceleration ramp.Also resets inverter after a fault has occurred.

Toggles the LED display between parameter number and itsvalue(number/value).

Increases the frequency, the parameter number or theparameter value.

Decreases the frequency, the parameter number or theparameter value.

Reverses the direction of motor rotation between Forward/Reverse

Toggles between the LOCAL and REMOTE modes ofoperation .

Performs theJOG function when pressed. Any DI programmedfor General Enable (if any) must be closed to enable the JOGfunction.

Thekeypad is used for programming and operating theCFW-08,allowing the following functions:

indication of the inverter status and operation variables;fault indication and diagnostics;viewing and programming parameters;

4.2 USE OF THE KEYPADHMI

FWD/REVcontrol selection

FWD / REV

HMI LED Situation

Forward

Reverse

Forward

t

t

t

Page 69: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

70

CHAPTER 4 - KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION

4.2.1 Keypad Operation All functions relating to the CFW-08 operation (Start/Stop,Direction of Rotation, JOG, Increment/Decrement of the Speed(Frequency) Reference, and selection of LOCAL/REMOTEmode) can be performed through theHMI selection. For factorydefault programming of the inverter, all keypad keys areenabled when the LOCAL Mode has been selected. Thesesame functions can be performed through digital and analoginputs. Thus you must program theparameters related to thesecorresponding inputs.

NOTE!The control keys , and are only enabled if:

P229=0 for LOCAL Mode operationP230=0 for REMOTE Mode operationThe key depends of the parameters above and if:P231=2

Keypad keys operation description:

When enabled (P220 = 2 or 3), selects the control input and thespeed reference (speed) source, toggling between LOCAL andREMOTE Mode.

When pressed, starts the motor according to accelerationramp up to the speed (frequency) reference. The function issimilar to that performed through digital input START/STOP,when it is closed (enabled) and maintained enabled.

Stop disables the inverter via deceleration Ramp.The Functionis similar to that performed through digital input START/STOP,when it is open (disabled) and maintained disabled.

When the JOG key is pressed, it accelerates the motoraccording to the acceleration ramp up to the JOG speedprogrammed in P122.This key is only enabled when the inverter digital inputs,programmed to general enable (if any) are closed.

When enabled (refer to the note above), reverses the motordirection of rotation.

Motor speed (frequency) setting: these keys are enabled forspeed setting only when:

the speed reference source is the keypad (P221 = 0 forLOCAL Mode and/or P222 = 0 for REMOTE Mode);the following parameter content is displayed: P002, P005or P121.

operation of the inverter (keys , , , and) and speed reference setting (keys and ).

Page 70: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

71

CHAPTER 4 - KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION

Line voltage is too low for inverteroperation (undervoltage condition).

Inverter is READY to be started.

Inverter is in a Fault condition. Fault codeis flashing on the display. In our examplewe have the fault code E02 (refer tochaper Maintenance).

Inverter is applying a DC current on themotor (DC braking) according to thevalues programmed at P300, P301 andP302 (refer to Chapter 6).

Inverter is running self-tuning routine toidentify motor parameters automatically.This operation is controlled byP408(referto Chapter 6).

NOTE!The display also flashes in the following conditions, besidesthe fault conditions:

trying to change a parameter value when it is not allowed.inverter in overload condit ion (refer to ChapterMaintenance).

Parameters P002 toP099 are reserved for the display of read-only values. The factory default display when power is appliedto the inverter is P002 (frequency proportional value in V/Fcontrol mode and motor speed in rpm in vector control mode).Parameter P205 defines the initial monitoring parameter, i.e.,defines the read-only variable that will be displayed when theinverter is powered up. For further information refer to P205description in Chapter 6.

4.2.2 Inverter Status

Parameter P121 stores the speed reference set by these keys.

When pressed, it increases the speed (frequency) reference.

When pressed, it decreases the speed (frequency) reference.

Reference Backup:The last frequency reference set by the keys the and

is stored when inverter is stopped or the AC power isremoved, provided P120 = 1 (reference backup active is thefactorydefault). Tochange thefrequency referencebeforestartingthe inverter, the valueof theparameter P121, must be changed.

4.2.3 Read-Only Variables

Page 71: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

72

CHAPTER 4 - KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION

NOTE!(1) For parameters that can be changed with themotor running,

the inverter will use the new value immediately after it hasbeen set. For parameters that can be changed only withmotor stopped, the inverter will use this new valueonly afterthe key is pressed.

(2) By pressing the key after the reprogramming, thenew programmed value will be stored automatically andwill remain stored until a new value is programmed.

4.2.4 Parameter Viewing andProgramming

All CFW-08 settings are made through parameters. Theparameter are shown on the display by the letter P followedby a number:Exmple (P101):

101 = Parameter Number

Each parameter is associated with a numerical value(parameter value), that corresponds to the selected optionamong the available ones for this parameter.

The parameter values define the inverter programming or thevalue of a variable (e.g.: current, frequency, voltage).For in-verter programming you should change the parametercontent(s).

It is necessary to set P000=5 before to change a parametervalue.Otherwise you can only read the parameter values, but notreprogram them. For more details, see P000 description inChapter 6.

ACTION HMI DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

Turn ON the inverter

Press the key

Use the keys and toreach P100

Press the key

Use the keys andkeys

Press the key

Inverter is ready to be started

Select the desired parameter

Numerical value associated with theparameter (4)

Set the new desired value (1) (4)

(1) (2) (3)

Page 72: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

73

CHAPTER 4 - KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION

(3) If the last programmed value in the parameter is notfunctionally compatible with other parameter values alreadyprogrammed, E24=Programming Error - will be displayed.Example of programming error:Programming of two digital inputs (DI) with the samefunction. Refer to Table 4.1 for list of programming errorsthat can generate an E24 Programming Error.

(4)Toallow the reprogramming of any parameter value (exceptfor P000 and P121) it is required to set P000=5.Otherwise you can only read the parameter values, but notreprogram them. For more details, see P000 descriptionin Chapter 6.

Programming Error – E24

Table 4.1 - Incompatibility of parameters - E24

JOG

P265=3 and other(s) DI(s) Start-Stop or FWD and REV or ON and OFFP266=3 and other(s) DI(s) Start-Stop or FWD and REV or ON and OFFP267=3 and other(s) DI(s) Start-Stop or FWD and REV or ON and OFFP268=3 and other(s) DI(s) Start-Stop or FWD and REV or ON and OFF

Local/ Remote Two or more parameters between P264, P265, P266, P267 and P268 equal to 1(LOC/REM)

Disables FlyingStart P265=13 and P266=13 or P267=13 or P268=13

Reset P265=10 and P266=10 or P267=10 or P268=10On/Off P263=14 and P26414 or P26314 and P264=14Direction ofrotation Two or more parameters P264, P265, P266, P267 and P268 = 0 (direction of rotation)

FWD/REV

P263=8 and P2648 and P26413P263=13 and P2648 and P26413P2638 and P26313 and P264=8P263=8 or 13 and P264=8 or 13 and P265=0 or P266=0 or P267=0 or P268=0P263=8 or 13 and P264=8 or 13 and P2312

Multispeed P221=6 or P222=6 and P2647 and P2657 and P2667 and P2677 and P2687P2216 and P2226 and P264=7 or P265=7 or P266=7 or P267=7 and P268=7

ElectronicPotentiometer

P221 = 4 or P222 = 4 and P265 5 or 16 and P266 5 or 16 and P2675 or 16 andP2685 or 16P221 4 or P222 4 and P265 = 5 or 16 or P266 = 5 or 16 or P267 = 5 or 16 orP268 = 5 or 16P265=5 or 16 and P2665 or 16 and P2685 or 16P266=5 or 16 and P2655 or 16 and P2675 or 16P267=5 or 16 and P2665 or 16 and P2685 or 16P268=5 or 16 and P2655 or 16 and P2675 or 16

Rated currentNominal P295 incompatible with the inverter model

DC Braking andRide-through P300 0 and P310 = 2 or 3

PID P203=1 and P221=1,4,5,6,7 or 8 or P222=1,4,5,6,7 or 8

Ramp 2

P265=6 and P266=6 or P265=6 and P267=6 or P265=6 and P268=6P266=6 and P267=6 or P267=6 and P268=6 or P266=6 and P268=6P265=6 or P266=6 or P267=6 or P268=6 and P263=13P265=6 or P266=6 or P267=6 or P268=6 and P264=13P265=6 or P266=6 or P267=6 or P268=6 and P263=13P265=6 or P266=6 or P267=6 or P268=6 and P264=13

Model P221=2,3,7 or 8 and standard inverterP221=2,3,7 or 8 and standard inverter

Input Analog P221=1 or P222=1 and P235=2, 3, 4 or 5P221 or P222=2 or 3 and P2392, 3, 4 or 5

Page 73: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

74

CHAPTER 4 - KEYPAD (HMI) OPERATION

NOTE!It is possible that during programming occurs the error E24caused by incompatibility between some parameters alreadyprogrammed.In this case do not stop with the parameter setting. If at theend of the parameter setting does not disappear, check tableof Incompatibilities (Table 4.1).

Page 74: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

75

5.1 PRE-POWERCHECKS

This Chapter provides the following information:

how to check and prepare the inverter before power-up;how to power-up and check for proper operation;how to operate the inverter when it is installed according tothe typical connections (refer to Section 3.2 - ElectricalInstallation).

The inverter shall be installed according to Chpater 3 -Installation and Connection. If the drive project is different fromthe typical suggested connections, follow the proceduresbelow.

DANGER!Alaways disconnect the AC input power before making anyconnections.

1) Check all connectionsCheck if the power, grounding and control connections arecorrect and well tightened.

2) Check the motorCheck all motor connections and verify if its voltage, currentand frequency match the inverter specifications.

3) Uncouple the load from the motorIf the motor can not be uncoupled, make sure that thedirection of rotation (FWD/REV) can not cause damage tothe machine.

After the inverter has been checked, AC power can be applied:

1) Check the power supplyMeasure the line voltage and check if it is within thespecified range (rated voltage: -15% / +10%).

2) Power-up the AC inputClose the input circuit breaker or disconnect switch.

3) Check if the power-up has been succesful - Inverterwith keypad (HMI-CFW08-P or HMI-CFW08-RS)

The keypad display will show:

5.2 INITIALPOWER-UP

START-UP

CHAPTER 5

Page 75: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

76

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

5.3 START-UP This Section describes start-up procedures when operatingvia the keypad (HMI). Two types of control will be considered:

V/F and Vetor Control:The V/F control is recommended in the following cases:

several motors driven by the same inverter;rated current of the motor is lower than 1/3 of rated invertercurrent;for test purposes, inverter is start-up without load.

The V/F control can also be used in applications that do notrequire fast dynamic responses, accurate speed regulationsor high starting torque (speed error will be a function of themotor slip); when you program parameter P138 - rated slip -you can obtain a speed accuracy of 1%.For the most applications, we recommend the vector controlmode, that permits a higher speed control accuracy (typical0.5%), higher starting torque and a faster dynamic response.

The necessary adjustments for the operation of the vectorcontrol areperformed automatically. In this case themotor shallbe connected to the CFW-08.

This means that the inverter is ready (rdy = ready) to beoperated.

- Inverter with dummy panel (TCL-CFW08 or TCR-CFW08).

The LEDs ON (green) and ERROR (red) are ON.Inverter runs some self-diagnosis routines. If no problems arefound the LED ERROR (red) turns OFF. This means that theinverter is now ready to be operated.

Thefour LEDs of thekeypad remains ON during this procedure.Inverter runs some self-diagnosis routines. If no problems arefound, the display shows:

DANGER!Even after theAC power supply has been disconnected, highvoltages may be still present. Wait at least 10 minutes afterpowering down to allow full discharge of the capacitors.

Page 76: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

77

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

NOTE!The last frequency reference (speed) vale set via theand keys is saved.

If you wish tochange this value before inverter enabling, changeparameter P121 (Keypad Reference).

NOTES:(1) If the direction of rotationof themotor is not correct, switch off

the inverter. Wait at least for 10 minutes to allow completecapacitor discharge and then swap any two wires at the mo-tor output.

(2) If the acceleration current becomes too high, mainly at lowfrequencies, set thetorqueboost (IxR compensation) at P136.Increase/decrease the content of P136 gadually until youobtain an operation with constant current over the entirefrequency range.For thecaseabove, refer toParameter Description in Chapter6.

(3) If E01 fault occurs during deceleration, increase thedeceleration time at P101 / P103.

ACTION HMI DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

Power-up the inverter

Press the key

Press the key and hold itdepressed until 60 Hz is reached

Press the key

Press the key

Press the key and hold itdepressed

Release the key

Inverter is ready to be operated

Motor accelerates from 0Hz to3Hz*(min.frequency), intheforward(CW)directionof rotation (1) * 90rpm for 4 pole motor.

Motor accelerates up to 60Hz* (2)

* 1800rpm for 4 pole motor

Motor decelerates (3) down to 0 rpm andthen reverses the direction of rotationCWCWW accelerating back to 60Hz

Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm

Motor accelerates up to JOG frequencygiven by P122. Ex: P122 = 5.00Hz.Reverse (CCW)

Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm

5.3.1 Start-upOperation via Keypad(HMI)- Typeof Control:Linear V/F(P202=0)

The sequence below is valid for the connection 1 (refer toSection 3.2.6). Inverter must be already installed and poweredup according to Chapter 3 and Section 3 and 5.2.

Connections according to Figure 3.6.

Page 77: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

78

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

5.3.2 Start-upOperation Via Terminals -Control Mode:Linear V/F (P202=0) Connections are according to Figures 3.6 and 3.16.

ACTION HMI DISPLAY DESCRIPTIONSee Figure 3.16Switch S1 (FWD / REV)=openSwitch S2 (Reset)=openSwitch S3 (Start/Stop)=openPotentiometer R1 (Ref.)=totallyCCWPower-up inverter

Press the key.

This procedure is not necessary wheninverters were delivered dummypanel,since it will be automatically in remotemode.

Close S3 – Start/Stop

Turn potentiometer totally CW.

Clse S1 – FWD / REV

Open S3 – Start / Stop

Inverter is ready to be operated.

Led LOCAL switches OFF and ledREMOTE switches ON. Control andReference are are switched toREMOTE(via terminals).NOTE:To maintain inverter permanently

in REMOTE mode, set P220=1.If the inverter is switched offand afterwards switched on, itwill now operate in local modebecause P220=2 (factorysetting). This setting meansthat the local/remote selectionsource is via keypad and thedefault mode (that is the modewhen the inverter is switchedon) is local. For furtherinformation see description ofP220 in Chapter 6.

Motor accelerates from 0Hz to 3Hz*(min. frequency), CW direction (1)

* 90rpm for 4-pole motorThe frequency reference is given by thepotentiometer R1.

Motor accelerates up to the themaximum frequency (P134 = 66Hz) (2)

Motor decelerates (3) down to 0 rpm(0Hz), reverses the direction of rotation(CW CWW) accelerating back up tothe maximum frequency (P134=66Hz).

Motor decelerates (3) down to 0 rpm.

NOTES!(1) If the direction of roation of the motor rotation is not correct,

switch off the inverter. Wait 10 minutes to allow a completecapacitor discharge and the swap any two wires at themotor output.

(2) If the acceleration current becomes too high, mainly at lowfrequencies, set the torque boost (IxR compensation) atP136.

Page 78: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

79

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

5.3.3 Start-upOperation via Keypad -Control Mode:Vector (P202=2)

ACTION HMI DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

Power-up inverter

Press key. Press thekey until P000 is reached. You canalso use the key to reachthe Paramater P000.

Press the key to enter intothe programming mode.

Use the keys and toset the passowrd value.

Press the key to save theselected option and to exit theprogramming mode.

Press the key or untilP202 is reached.

Press the key to enter intothe programming mode.

Inverter is ready to be operated

P000=access for changing parameters

Enter the programming mode

P000=5: permits parameter changing

Exit the programming mode

This parameter defines the control type0=V/F Linear1=V/F Quadratic2=Vector

Enter the programming mode

Increase/decrease the content of P136 gadually until youobtain an operation with constant current over the entirefrequency range.For the case above, refer to Parameter Description inChapter 6.

(3) If E01 fault occurs during deceleration, increase thedeceleration time at P101 / P103.

The sequence below is based on the following inverter andmotor example:Inveter: CFW080040S2024ESZMotor: WEG-IP55

Power: 0.75HP/0.55kW;Frame size: 71; RPM: 1720; Number of Poles: IV;Power factor (cos ): 0.70;Efficiency (): 71%;Rated Current at 220V: 2.90A;Frequency: 60Hz.

NOTE!The notes in Table below can be found on page 59.

Page 79: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

80

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

ACTION HMI DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

Use the and keysto select the control type

Press the to save the selectedoption and to start the tuning routineafter changing to Vector Control mode

Press the key and use thekeys and to set thecorrect rated motor efficiency (inthis case 71%)Press the key to save theselected option and to exit theprogramming mode

Press the key to go to thenext parameter

Press the key and use thekeys and to set thecorrect rated motor voltage

Press the key to save theselected option and exit theprogramming mode

Press the key to go to thenext parameter

Press the key and use thekeys and o set thecorrect rated motor current (in thiscase 2.90A)Press the key to save theselected option and to exit theprogramming mode

Press the to go to the nextparameter

Press the key and use thekeys and the to set thecorrect motor speed (in this case1720rpm)Press the key to save theselected option and exit theprogramming mode

Press the key to go to thenext parameter

P202=2: Vector

Motor efficiency:50 to 99,9%

Set motor efficiency:71%

Exit the programming mode

Rated motor voltage range:0 to 600V

Set rated motor voltage:220V (the default value is maintained)(2)

Exit the programming mode

Rated motor current range:0.3 x Inom to 1.3 x Inom

Set rated motor current: 2.90A

Exit the programming mode

Rated motor rpm range:0 to 9999 rpm

Programmed rated motor rpm:1720 rpm

Exit the programming mode

Rated motor frequency:0 to Fmax

Page 80: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

81

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

ACTION HMI DISPLAY DESCRIPTIONPress the and use the keys

and to set the correctvalue for the motor frequency.

Press the key to save theselected option and exit theprogramming mode

Press the key to go to thenext parameter

Press the key and use thekeys and to set the thecorrect motor power.

Press the key to save theselected option and exit theprogramming mode

Press the key to got to thenext parameter

Press the key and use thekeys and to set thecorrect motor power factor (in thiscase 0.70)

Press the key to save theselected option and exit theprogramming mode

Press the key to go to thenext parameter

Press the key and use thekeys and to authorize ornot the start of the parameter estimate

Press the key to start theself-tuning routine. While the self-tuning routine is running, the displayshows "Auto”.

The running of the Self-TuningRoutine can last until 2 minutes andafter ending display will show “rdy”(ready), when the motor parameterwere acquired with success.Otherwise the fault “E14” is shown.In this case refer to Note (1) below.

Set rated motor frequency:60Hz (the default value ismaintained)(2)

Exit the programming mode

Rated motor power range:0 to 15 (each value represents a powervalue)

Selected rated motor power:4 = 0.75HP / 0.55kW

Exit the programming mode

Motor power factor range:0.5 to 0.99

Set motor power factor:0.70

Exit the programming mode

Parameter estimation?0 = No1 = Yes

1 = Yes

Self-tuning is running

Inverter finished the self-tuning routineand is ready for operation

or

Running of self-tuning routine has notbeen realized with success (1)

OR

Page 81: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

82

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

NOTE!The last speed referencevalueset via key and keysis saved.If you wish to change this value before enabling of inverter,change the value of the Parameter P121 - KeypadReference;

The self-tuning routine can be cancelled by pressing thekey.

NOTES:(1) If during the running of the Self-Tuning Routine the display

shows E14, this means that the motor parameters werenot acquired correctly by the inverter. The most commonreason for this fault may be that the motor has not beencoupled to the inverter output. However motors with verylower currents than the used inverter, or incorrect motorconnection may also cause the fault E14. In this case,operate the inverter in V/F mode (P202=0). When the mo-tor is not connected and the fault condition E14 is indicated,proceed as follows:

Switch off the inverter. Wait at least 5 minutes to allow acomplete discharge of the capacitors.

ACTION HMI DISPLAY DESCRIPTION

Press the key

Press the key and hold it

depressed until the speed of1980rpm is reached

Press the key

Press key

Press the key and hold itdepresed

Release the key

Motor accelerates up to 90rpm (for IVpole motor - minimum speed) in CWdirection of rotation (3)

Motor accelerates up to 1980rpm (forIV pole motor - maximum speed)

Motor decelerates (4) tom 0 rpm andthe reverses the direction of rotationaccelerating back to 1980rpm

Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm

Motor accelerates from 0 rpm up to theJOG speed set at P122.Ex: P122 = 5.00Hz that correspondsto 150rpm for IV-pole motor.Reverse (CCW) direction of rotation

Motor decelerates down to 0 rpm

Page 82: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

83

CHAPTER 5 - START-UP

Connect the motor to the inverter output.Switch on the inverter.Set P000=5 and P408=1.Follow from now on the start-up procedures describedin Section 5.3.3.

(2) For each inverter type, the parameters P399 to P407 areset automatically to the rated motor data, considering astandard WEG motor, IV poles, 60Hz.When different motors are used, you must set theparameters manually, according to the motor nameplatedata.

(3) If thedirection of rotation of the motor is not correct, switchoff the inveter. Wait at least 5 minutes to allow a completedischarge of the capacitors and then swap any two wiresat the motor output.

(4) If fault E01 occurs during deceleration, you must increasethe deceleration time at P101/P103.

Page 83: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

84

CHAPTER 6

6.1 SYMBOLS

DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes in detail all CFW-08 parameters andfunctions.

Please find below some symbols used in this chapter:AIx = Analog input number x.AO = Analog output.DIx = Digital input number x.F* = Frequency reference. This is the frequency value thatindicates the desired motor speed at the inverter output.F

e= Input frequency of theacceleration and deceleration ramp.

Fmax

= Maximum output frequency, defined at P134.F

min= Minimum output frequency, defined at P133.

Fs

= Output frequency - frequency applied to the motor.Inom = Rated inverter output current (rms), in Ampères (A). Thisvalue is defined in P295.Is

= Inverter output current.Ia

= Active current at inverter output, i.e., it is the compomentof the total motor current proportional to active electric powerabsorbed by the motor.RLx = Relay output number x.U

d= DC link voltage in the DC link circuit.

This section describes the main concepts related to theCFW-08 frequencyinverter.

As already informed in section 2.3, CFW-08 has in thesame product a V/F control and a sensorless vector control(VVC: “voltage vector control”).The user must choose one of them. Please find below adescription of each control mode.

This control mode is based on the constant V/F curve(P202=0- linear V/F curve). Its performance is limited at low frequenciesas function of the voltage drop in the stator resistance, thatcauses a significant magnetic flow reduction in the motor airgap and consequently reducing the motor torque. Thisdeficiency should be compensated by using manual andautomatic boost torque (IxR compensations), that are setmanually and depend on the user experience.

In most applications (for instance: centrifugal pumps and fans)the setting of these functions is enough to obtain the requiredperformance. But there are applications that require a moresophisticated control. In thesecases it´s recommended the useof the sensorless vector control, that will be described in thesection below.

6.2 INTRODUCTION

6.2.2 V/F Control

6.2.1 Control Modes

Page 84: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

85

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

6.2.3 Vector Control (VVC)

In V/F control, the speed regulation, that can be obtained bysetting properly slip compensation can be maintained within1% to 2% of the rated speed. For instance, for a IV pole mo-tor/60Hz, the minimum speed variation at no load conditionand at rated load can be maintained between 18 and 36rpm.

There is still a variation of the linear V/F control: the quadraticV/F control. This control mode is suitable for applications likecentrifugal pumps and fans (loads with quadratic torque xspeed characteristics), since it enables a motor loss reduction,resulting in an additional energy saving by using an inverter.For more details about the V/F control mode, please refer tothe description of the parameters P136, P137, P138, P142and P145.

The CFW-08 vector control is sensorless, i.e., it does notrequire a signal of the speed feedback through tachogeneratoror encoder coupled on motor shaft.To maintain the magnetic flux in the motor air gap constant,and consequently the motor torque, within the whole speedvariation range (from zero up to the field weakening point), asophisticated control algorithm is used that considers themathematic model of the induction motor.Thus one can maintain the magnetic flux in the motor air gapapproximately constant at frequencies down to approximately1 Hz.In vector control mode one can obtain a speed regulation of0.5% (relating to the rated speed). Thus, for instance, for a IVpole motor/60Hz one can obtain a speed variation in the ran-ge of 10rpm (!).Other advantage of the vector control is its easy settingprocedure.The user needs only to enter in theparameters P399 and P407the information about the used motor (nameplate data) andruns the self-tuning routine(by setting P408=1) and the inverter configures itself to therequired application. So the inverter is ready to be operatedin an optimized manner.For more information, refer to the description of the followingparameters: P178 and P399 to P409.

Page 85: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

86

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

The frequency reference (i.e., thedesired output frequency, oralternatively, themotor speed) can bedefined in several ways:

The keypad - digital reference that can be changed throughthe keypad (HMI), by using the keys and ,(see P221, P222 and P121);Analog input - the analog input AI1 (XC1:6) or the AI2(XC1:8) can be used, or both (see P221, P222 and P234to P240);Multispeed - up to 8 preset digital references (see P221,P222 and P124 to P131);Electronic potentiometer (EP) - another digital reference,its value is defined by using 2 digital inputs (DI3 and DI4) -see P221, P222, P265 and 266;Via serial.

Figure 6.1 shows through a diagram block the frequencyreference definition to be used by the inverter.

NOTE!AI2 is only available in CFW-08 Plus version.With S1:1 OFF and when connected to 24V(external) withS1:1 to ON.DIs ON when connected to 0V (XC1:5).When F*<0 one takes the module of F* and reverses thedirection of rotation (if this is possible - P231=2 and if theselected control is not forward run/reverse run.

6.2.4 Frequency ReferenceSources

Page 86: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

87

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Figure 6.1 - Block diagram of the frequency reference

RS-232

PC and CLP

KEYPADREFERENCE

(P121)

HMI-CFW08-RP orHMI-CFW08-RS

KCS-CFW-08P124 to P131

P264=7P265=7P266=7

MULTISPEED

Accel.

Enabling Function

P265=5P266=5

Decel.

InverterDisabled

ELECTRONICPOTENTIOMETER (EP)

AI2

AI1

DI4DI3

DI2123456789

101112

XC1

AI1

P235

AI2

P239

P238 P134

P234 P134

P236

P240

2 or 3 - AI2

7 - Add AI>0

8 - Add AI

1 - AI1

4 - EP

6 - Multispeed

5 - Serial orCANopen orDeviceNet

0 - Keypad

Frequency ReferenceSelection

P221 or P222

F*

DigitalReferences

AnalogReferences

P131P130P129P128P127P126P125P124

000 001 010 011 100 101 110 111

100%

P239=0

P239=102V/4mA 10V/20mA

100%

P235=0

P235=102V/4mA 10V/20mA

0 V

Reset

HMI-CFW08-P

RS-485

KRS-485

KFB-CO or KFB-DN

CANopenor

DeviceNet

Page 87: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

88

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Fe

Commandvia DigitalInput (DI)

Acceleration&Deceleration

Ramp 2

Acceleration &Deceleration

RampP102 P103

P100 P101

DC LinkRegulation

P151

P151

Ud

P133P134

FrequencyReference

Limits

P202 P295

InverterControl(V/F orVector)

P136,P137,P138,P142, P145

MotorParameters

(P399 to P409)

P178

Vs

PWM

P169

IsP169

Is

Output CurrentLimiting

I

Vs

Ud

PowerSupply

IM3Ø

Is

NOTE!In V/F control mode (P202=0 or 1), Fe = F* (see Fig. 6.1) ifP138=0 (slip compensation disabled). If P1380, see Fi-gure 6.9 for the relation between Fe and F*.

In vector control mode (P202=2) always Fe = F* (see Figu-re 6.1).

Figure 6.2 - Block diagram of the inverter control

The block diagram in Figure 6.2 shows the inverter control.

Page 88: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

89

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

6.2.5 Commands

6.2.6 Local/RemoteOperation Modes

The inverter has the following commands: PWM pulse enabling/disabling, definition of the direction of rotation and JOG.As the reference, the inverter commands can de defined inseveral ways.

The command sources are the following:

via keypad - keys , , and ;via control terminals (XC1) - digital inputs;via serial interface.

The inverter enabling and disabling commands can be definedas follows:

via keypad and of the HMI;via serial;start/stop (terminals XC1 - DI(s) - see P263 to P266);general enable (terminals XC1 - DI(s) - see P263 to P266);forward run (terminals XC1 - DI(s) - see P263 to P264), itdefines also the diretion of rotation;ON/OFF (3-wire controls) (terminals XC1 - DIs - see P263and P264).

The definition of the direction of rotation can be defined byusing:

the key of the keypad;serial;digital input (DI) programmed for FWD/REV (see P264 toP266);digital inputs programmed as FWD / REV, that defines bothinverter enabling or disabling and direction of rotation (seeP263 e P264);analog input - when the reference is via analog input and anegative offset is programmed (P236 or P240<0), thereference may assume negative values, thus reversing thedirection of the motor rotation.

User can define two different conditions relating to thefrequency reference source and the inverter commands: theseare the local and the remote operation modes.Figure 6.3 shows the local and remote operation modes in ablock diagram.With the factory setting in local mode the inverter can becontrolled by using the keypad, while in remote mode allcontrols are via terminals (XC1).

Page 89: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

90

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Figure 6.3 - Block diagram of the local and remote operation mode

LOCAL

FrequencyReference

P221

Controls P229(stop/run,FWD/REVand JOG)

0 Keypad (HMI-CFW-08-P,HMI - CFW-08- RP andHMI-CFW-08-RS)1 AI12 or 3 AI24 EP5 Serial6 Multispeed7 Add AI8 Add AI>0

0 Keypad (HMI-CFW-08-Pand HMI - CFW-08- RP)1 Bornes XC1 (DIs)2 Serial or HMI- CFW08-RSkeypad

REMOTE

FrequencyReference

P222

Controls P230(stop/run,FWD/REVand JOG)

F* REFERENCE

COMMANDS

Local/Remote Selection (P220)+

Local/Remote Command

( , DI, serial, etc)

6.3 PARAMETERLISTING

In order to simplify the explanation, the parameters have beengrouped by characteristics and functions:

Variables that can be viewed on thedisplay, but can not be changed by theuser.

Programmable values usedby theCFW-08 functions.

They define the inverter characteristics,the functions to be executed, as well asthe input/output functions of the controlboard.

Data about the applied motor: dataindicated on the motor nameplate andthose obtained during the running of theself-tuning routine.

Here are included parameters related tospecial functions, like PID regulator.

0 Keypad (HMI-CFW-08-P,HMI - CFW-08- RP andHMI-CFW-08-RS)1 AI12 or 3 AI24 EP5 Serial6 Multispeed7 Add AI8 Add AI>0

0 Keypad (HMI-CFW-08-Pand HMI - CFW-08- RP)1 Bornes XC1 (DIs)2 Serial or HMI- CFW08-RSkeypad

Read-Only Parameters

Regulation Parameters

Configuration Parameters

Motor Parameters

Special Function Parameters

Page 90: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

91

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / NotesP000 0 to 999Parameter [ 0 ]Access 1

6.3.1 Access and Read Only Parameters - P000 to P099

P002 0 to 6553Frequency [ - ]Proportional 0.01 (99.99);Value 0.1 (100.0);

1 (1000)

P003 0 to 1.5 x Inom

Motor Output [ - ]Current 0.01A (9.99A);

0.1A (10.0A)

P004 0 to 862DC Link Voltage [ - ]

1V

Releases the access to change the parameter values.The password is 5.The use of the password is always active.

Indicates the value of P208 x P005.When the vector control mode is used (P202=2), P002indicates the actual motor speed in rpm.In case of different scales and units, use P208.

Indicates the inverter output current inAmps (A).

Indicates the inverter DC Link voltage in volt (V).

P005 0 to 300MotorOutput [ - ]Frequency 0.01Hz (99.99Hz);

0.1Hz (100.0Hz)

Indicates the inverter output frequency in Hertz (Hz).

P007 0 to 600Motor Output [ - ]Voltage 1V

Indicates the inverter output voltage in Volts (V).

Following notes may appear in some parameters during thedetailed description:Notes found on the Parameters Quick Reference.

(1)This parameter is only displayed in vector mode (P202=2).(2)This parameter is only displayed in scalar mode P202=0

or 1.(3)This parameter can be enchanged only when the inverter

is disabled (stopped motor).(4)This parameter is only available with HMI-CFW08-RS.(5)The analog input value is represented by zero when it is

not connected to an external signal.(6)This parameter is only available in the CFW-08 Plus

version.(7)The parameter value changes automatically when P203=1.

Page 91: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

92

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

P008 25 to 110Heatsink [ - ]Temperature 1oC

Indicates the current power at the heatsink in Celsiusdegrees (°C).The inverter overtemperature protection (E04) acts whenheatsink temperature reaches:

P009 (1) 0.0 to 150.0Motor Torque [ - ]

0.1%

Indicates the torque developed by motor in percent (%)relating to the set rated motor torque.The rated motor torque is defined by the parametersP402 (motor speed) and P404 (motor power). I.e.:

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

Tabla 6.1 - The temperature to act the overtemperature protection

P023 x.yzSoftware Version [ - ]

-

P040 0 to P528PID Process [ - ]Variable 1

Indicates the software version installed in the DSPmemory located on the control board.Parameter P040, P203, P520 to P528 are only availablefrom the software version V3.50 on.

Indicates the value of the process variable used as PIDfeedback, in percent (%), (value % x P528).The PID function is only available from the softwareversion V3.50 on.The indication unit can be changed through P528.See detailed description of the PID regulator in Section6.3.5 - Special Function Parameters.

where Tnom

is given in kgf.m, Pnom

is the rated motor powerin watts - HP - (P404), and n

nomis the rated motor speed

in rpm - P402.

P014 00 to 41Last Fault [ - ]

-

Indicates the code of the last occured fault.Section 7.1 shows a list of possible faults, their codenumbers and possible causes.

Tnom = 716 . Pnom

nnom

Inverter1.6-2.6-4.0-7.0A/200-240V1.0-1.6-2.6-4.0A/380-480V

7.3-10-16A/200-240V2.7-4.3-6.5-10A/380-480V

13-16A/380-480V22-28-33A/200-240V

24-30A/380-480V

P008 [°C] @ E041039090

103103104104

Page 92: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

93

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

0.1 to 999[ 5.0s ]

0.1s (99.9s);1s (100s)

0.1 to 999[ 10.0s ]

0.1s (99.9s);1s (100s)

0.1 to 999[ 5.0s ]

0.1s (99.9s);1s (100s)

0.1 to 999[ 10.0s ]

0.1s (99.9s);1s (100s)

This set of parameters defines the time to acceleratelinearly from zero up to the rated frequency and todecelerate linearly from the rated frequency down to zero.The rated frequency is defined by parameter:- P145 in V/F control (P202=0 or 1);- P403 in vector control (P202=2).When factory setting is used, inverter always follows thetime defined in P100 and P101.Ramp 2 is used, the the acceleration and decelerationtimes follow the values programmed at P102 and P103,use a digital input. See parameters P263 to P265.Depending on the load inertia, too short acceleration ti-mes can disable the inverter due to overcurrent (E00).Depending on the load inertia, too short deceleration ti-mes can disable the inverter due to overvoltage (E01).For more details, refer to P151.

6.3.2 Regulation Parameters - P100 to P199

P100AccelerationTime

P101DecelerationTime

P102AccelerationTime Ramp 2

P103DecelerationTime Ramp 2

P104 0 to 2S Ramp [ 0 - Inactive ]

-

The ramp S reduces mechanical stress during theacceleration and deceleration of the load.

Output frequency(Motor speed)

P104012

Ramp SInativa50%100%

Linear

t (s)Accel Time

(P100/P102)Decel Time

(P101/P103)

50% rampa S

100% rampaS

Figure 6.4 - S or linear ramp

It is recommended to use the S ramp with digitalfrequency/speed references.

Table 6.2 - S Ramp Configuration

Page 93: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

94

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

P120 0 to 2Digital Reference [ 1 - active ]Backup -

Defines if the inverter should save or not the last useddigital reference. This backup function is only applicableto the keypad reference.

If the digital reference backup is inactive (P120=0), thereference will be equal to the minimum frequency everytime the inverter is enabled, according to P133.When P120=1, inverter saves automatically the digitalreference value, independent of the reference source,keypad, EP or serial).P120=2, could be helpful when the reference is via EPand theuser donot want tostart at theminimum frequencynor at the last frequency. It is desirable to start at a fixedvalue, that should be set in P121. After finishing theacceleration ramp the reference is passed to EP again.

P121 P133 to P134Keypad [ 3.00Hz ]Reference 0.01Hz (99.99Hz);

0.1Hz (100.0Hz)

Allows the setting of the output frequency to the motorthrough and keys.This setting may also be performed while visualizingparameters P002 and P005.

The keys and areenabled if P221=0 (in localmode) or P222=0 (in remote mode).The value of P121is maintained at the last set value, even when inverter isdisabled or turned OFF, provided P120=1 or 2 (backupactive).

Defines the frequency reference (speed) for the JOGfunction. The JOG function can be activated in severalways:

P122 P133 to P134JOG Speed [ 5.00Hz ]Reference 0.01Hz (99.99Hz);

0.1Hz (100.0Hz)

Table 6.4 - JOG reference configuration

P12001

2

Reference BackupInactiveActive

Active, but always give by P121,independentlyof the sorce reference

Table 6.3 - Digital Reference Backup configuration

The key of the HMI-CFW08-P

The key of the HMI-CFW08-RS

DI3

DI4

Serial

P229=0 (local model) orP230=0 (remote mode)P229=2 (local model) orP230=2 (remote mode)P265=3 and P229=1 (local)or P230=1 (remote)P266=3 and P229=1 (local)or P230=1 (remote)P229=2 (local mode) orP230=2 remote mode)

Page 94: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

95

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / NotesTo operate JOG function works, the inverter must bedisabled by ramp (stopped motor). Thus if the controlsource is via terminal, there must be at least one digitalinput programmed as start/stop enabling (otherwise E24will be displayed), which must be OFF to enable the JOGfunction via digital input.The direction of rotation is defined by parameter P231.

Multispeed is used when the selection of anumber up to8 pre-programmed speeds is desired.It allows the control of the output speed by relating thevalues programmed by the parameters P124 to P131,according to the logical combination of the digital inputsprogrammed for multispeed.Activation of the multispeed function:- ensure that the reference source is given by themultispeed function, i.e., set P221=6 in local mode orP222=6 in remote mode;

- program one or more digital inputs to para multispeed,according to table below:

P124 P133 a P134Multispeed Ref. 1 [ 3.00Hz ]

0.01Hz(99.99Hz);0.1Hz (100.0Hz)

P125 P133 a P134Multispeed Ref. 2 [ 10.00Hz ]

0.01Hz(99.99Hz);0.1Hz (100.0Hz)

P126 P133 a P134Multispeed Ref. 3 [ 20.00Hz ]

0.01Hz(99.99Hz);0.1Hz (100.0Hz)

P127 P133 a P134Multispeed Ref. 4 [ 30.00Hz ]

0.01Hz(99.99Hz);0.1Hz (100.0Hz)

P128 P133 a P134Multispeed Ref. 5 [ 40.00Hz ]

0.01Hz(99.99Hz);0.1Hz (100.0Hz)

P129 P133 a P134Multispeed Ref. 6 [ 50.00Hz ]

0.01Hz(99.99Hz);0.1Hz (100.0Hz)

P130 P133 a P134Multispeed Ref. 7 [ 60.00Hz ]

0.01Hz(99.99Hz);0.1Hz (100.0Hz)

P131 P133 a P134Multispeed Ref. 8 [ 66.00Hz ]

0.01Hz(99.99Hz);0.1Hz (100.0Hz)

The frequency reference is defined by the status of thedigital inputs programmed to multispeed as shown intable below:

Note: Digital inputs DI2 and Dl5 shallnot be set for multispeed function simultaneously.

In case it happens, the VFD will indicate an E24 error (programming error).

Table 6.5 - Parameters setting for defining the multispeedfunction through digital inputs.

DI2 DI3 DI4 Freq. ReferenceOpen Open Open P124

Open Open 0V P125Open 0V Open P126

Open 0V 0V P1270V Open Open P128

0V Open 0V P1290V 0V Open P1300V 0V 0V P131

8 speeds4 speeds

2 speeds

DI ProgrammingDI2 P264 = 7DI3 P265 = 7DI4 P266 = 7DI5 P267 = 7

Table 6.6 - Frequancy Reference

Page 95: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

96

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description/Notes

The multispeed function has some advantages for thestabibilty of the fixed preprogrammed references and theimmunity against electrical noises (digital references andinsulated digital inputs).

P133 0.00 to P134Minimum [ 3.00Hz ]Frequency (F

min) 0.01Hz(99.99Hz);

0.1Hz (100.0Hz)

P134 P133 to 300.0Maximum [ 66.00Hz ]Frequency (F

max) 0.01Hz(99.99Hz);

0.1Hz (100.0Hz)

Defines the maximum and minimum output frequency(motor) when inverter is enabled.It is valid for any type of speed reference.The parameter P133 defines a dead zone when analoginputs are used - see parameters P234 to P240.P134 and thegain and offset of the analog input(s) (P234,P236, P238 and P240) define the scale and the rangeof the speed variation via analog input(s). For moredetails see parameters P234 to P240.

P136 (2) 0.0 to 30.0Manual Torque [ 5.0% forBoost 1.6-2.6-4.0-7.0A/(IxR 200-240V andCompensation) 1.0-1.6-2.6-4.0A/

380-480V;2.0% for

7.3-10-16A/200-240V and

2.7-4.3-6.5-10A/380-480V;1.0% for

22-28-33A/200-240V and

13-16A/380-480V]

Compensates the voltage drop due to the motor statorresistance. It acts at low speeds by increasing the inver-ter output voltage, in order to maintain a constant torqueduring the V/F operation.The best setting is to program the lowest value for P136that still permits the motor start satisfactorily. If the valueis higher than required, an inverter overcurrent (E00 orE05) may occur due tohigh motor currents at low speeds.

P128

P129

P130

P131Outputfrequency

AccelerationRamp

P126

P127

Figure 6.5 - Time diagram of the multispeed function

Time0V

DI2 or DI5

DI3

DI4

open0Vopen0Vopen

P124

P125

Page 96: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

97

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

P137 (2) 0.00 to 1.00Automatic Torque [ 0.00 ]Boost -(Automatic IxRCompensation)

The automatic torque boost compensates for the voltagedrop in the stator resistance as a function of the activemotor current.The criteria for setting P137 are the same as for theparameter P136.

Figure 6.6 a) b) - V/F curve and details of the manual torque boost(IxR compensation)

Output Voltage(% of the line voltage)

P142

P136xP142

0 P145

OutputFrequency

Output Voltage(% of the line voltage)

P142

P136

0 P145

OutputFrequency

b) P202=1

Figure 6.7 - Block diagram of the automatic torque boost function

SpeedReference (F*)

OutputActiveCurrent (I

a) Filter

AutomaticTorque Boost

P137

ManualTorque Boost

P136

P007 MotorVoltage

a) P202=0

Page 97: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

98

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

P138 (2) 0.0 to 10.0Slip [0.0]Compensation 0.1%

The parameter P138 is used in the motor slipcompensation function.

This function compensates the drop of the motor speeddue to load, which is a inherent characteristic relating tothe operation principle of the induction motor.

This speed drop is compensated by increasing the outputfrequency (and voltage) (applied to the motor) as afunction of the increase of the active motor current, asshown in the block diagram and in the V/F curve below.

Compensation Zone

Maximum(P142)

Output Voltage

OutputFrequency

FieldWeakening (P145)

4Hz0

Figure 6.8 - V/F curve with automatic torque boost(automatic IxR compensation )

SlipCompensation

OutputActiveCurrent (Ia)

FrequencyReference (F*)

Ramp InputFrequency (Fe)

F

Filter P138

Figure 6.9 - Block diagram of the slip compensation function

Page 98: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

99

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

To set the parameter P138 use the following procedure:

- run the motor without load up to approximately half ofthe application top speed;

- measure the actual motor or equipment speed;- apply rated load to equipment;- increase parameter P138 until the speed reaches its

no-load speed.

P142(2) (3) 0 to 100Maximum Output [ 100% ]Voltage 1%

P145(2) (3) P133 to P134Field Weakening [ 60.00Hz ]Frequency 0.01Hz(99.99Hz);(F

nom) 0.1Hz (100.0Hz)

Define the V/F curve used in V/Fcontrol (P202=0 or 1).These parameters allow changing the standard V/F cur-ve defined at P202 - programmable V/F curve.P142 sets the maximum output voltage. This value is setas a percent of the inverter supply voltage.Parameter P145 defines the rated frequency of the mo-tor used.The V/F curve relates the inverter output voltage andfrequency (applied to the motor) and consequently themagnetizing flux of the motor.The programmable V/F curve can be used in specialapplications where the motors used require a ratedvoltage and/or frequency different than the standardones. Examples: motor for 220V/400Hz and a motor for200V/60Hz.Parameter P142 is also useful in appplications thatrequire rated voltage different from the inverter supplyvoltage. Example: 440V line and 380V motor.

Figure 6.10 - V/F curve with slip compensation

Output Voltage

(function ofthe motor

load)

OutputFrequency

Page 99: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

100

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

P151 325 to 410DC Link Voltage (line 200-240V)Regulation Level [ 380V ]

1V

564 to 820(line 380-480V)

[ 780V ]1V

The DC link voltage regulation (ramp holding) avoidsovervoltage trips (E01) during deceleration of high inertialoads and/or short deceleration times.It acts in order to increase the deceleration time(according to load - inertia), thus avoiding the E01activation.

Figure 6.11 - Adjustable V/F curve

Output Voltage

OutputFrequencyP1450.1Hz

0

P142

E01 - Overvoltage

CI limitation

Cl VoltageUd (P004)

Time

OutputFrequnecy

(Motor speed)

Rated Ud

P151

Time

Figure 6.12 - Deceleration curve with DC Link voltage limitation(regulation)

DC Linkvoltage

Page 100: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

101

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

By this function an optimized deceleration t ime(minimum) is achieved for the driven load.This function is useful in applications with medium inertiathat require short deceleration times.In case of overvoltage trip during the decelearation, youmust reduce gradually the value of P151 or increase thetime of the deceleration ramp (P101 and/or P103).The motor will not stop if the line is permanently withovervoltage (U

d>P151). In this case, reduce the line

voltage, or increase the value of P151.If even with these settings the motor does not deceleratewithin the required time, you will have the followingalternatives- use the dynamic braking (for more details, see Item

8.21);- if inverter is being operated in V/F control, increase

P136;- if inverter is being operated in vector control, increase

P178.

NOTE!When dynamic braking is used, set P151 to themaximum value.

P156 0.2xPInom to 1.3xPInom

Motor Overload [ 1.2xP401 ]Current 0.01A (9.99A);

0.1A ( 10.0A)

This function is used to protect the motor against overload(Ixt function - E05).Themotor overload current is thecurrent levelabove whichthe in verter will consider the motor operating underoverload. The higher the difference between the motorcurrent and the overloadcurrent, thesooner theIxt function- E05 - will act.

Figure 6.13 - Ixt function – Overload detection

3,0

2,0

1,5

1,0

15 30 60 90Time(s)

Motor Current (P003)Overload Current

Page 101: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

102

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

Prevents motor stalling during an overload. If motor loadincreases its current will increase too. If the motor currentattempts to exceed the value set at P169, the motorspeed will be decreased by following the decelerationramp until the current becomes lower than P169.As soon as the overload condition disappears, the mo-tor speed is resumed.

P169 0.2xPInom

to 2.0xPInom

Maximum [ 1.5xP295 ]Output Current 0.01A (9.99A);

0.1A ( 10.0A)

Parameter P156 must be set from 10% to 20% higherthan the rated motor current (P401).Always P401 is changed, P156 is adjusted automaticallyto 1.1xP401.

Figure 6.14 – Curves showing the actuation of the current limitation

Timeduring

cont. duty

Time

Motor Current

Deceleration ramp (P101/P103)

decel.ramp

accel.ramp

duringdeceleration

duringacceleration

accelerationramp

(P100/P102)

Speed

P169

The current limitation function is disabled whenP169>1.5xP295.

P178 (1) 50.0 to 150.0Rated Flux [ 100% ]

0.01( 9.99);0.1(10.0)

Defines the flux in the motor air gap, when invector control.It is expressed as a percentage (%) of the nominal flux.Generally it is not necessary to change P178 of thedefault value (100%). But in some specific cases, differentvalues at P178 may be set.These conditions may be:- to increase the inverter torque capacity (P178>100%).Examples:1) to increase the motor starting torque and thus ensure

faster motor starts;2) to increase the inverter braking torque and thus allow

faster stops, without using dynamic braking.- to reduce the inverter energy consumption(P178<100%).

Page 102: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

103

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / NotesDefines the inverter control mode. Item 5.3 gives someguidelines relating to the selection of control type.

P202 (3) 0 to 2Control Made [ 0 - V/F linear ]

-

As shown in table above, there are 2 V/F control modes:

Scalar Control Modes:Linear V/F control: this control mode ensures a flux in themotor air gap approximately constant from around 3Hzup to the field weakening (defined by the parametersP142 and P145).Thus in this speed range, an approximately constanttorque capacity is obtained. This control mode isrecommended for belt conveyors, extruding machines,etc.

Quadratic V/F control: in this control mode the flux in themotor air gap is proportional to the output frequency upto the field weakening point (defined at P142 and P145).Thus the torque capacity is a function of the quadraticspeed. The main advantage of this type of control is theenergy saving capability with variable torque loads, dueto the reduction of the motor losses (mainly due to motoriron losses and magnetic losses).

Main application fields for this type of control are:centrifugal pumps, fans, multimotor drivings.

6.3.3 Configuration Parameters - P200 to P398

Output Voltage

P136=0

P142

0P145

OutputFrequency

P202012

Type of ControlLinear V/F Control (scalar)

Quadratic V/F Control (scalar)Vector Control

a) Linear V/F

Table 6.7 - Adjustment for each control mode

Page 103: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

104

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

Selects or not the special function of the PID regulator.P203 (3) 0 or 1Special Function [ 0 - None ]Selection -

P20301

Special functionNone

PID regulator

See detailed description of PID regulator parameters(P520 to P528).W hen P203 is changed to 1, P265 is changedautomatically to 15 (DI3 = manual/automatic).

The vector control allows a better performance regardingto torque and speed control. The CFW-08 vector controloperates without motor speed sensor (sensorless). Itmust be applied when followingperformances are required:- better dynamics (faster accelerations and stoppings);- when a more accurate speed control is required;- when high torques at low speeds are required ( 5Hz).Examples: in positioning, such as load moving, packingmachines, pumps, dosing machines, etc.The vector control can not be used in multimotorapplications.The performance of the vector control with a switchingfrequency of 10kHz is not so good as when a switchingfrequency of 5kHz or 2.5kHz is used. It is not possible touse a vector control with a switching frequency of 15kHz.For more details about the vector control, refer to Item6.2.3.

Figure 6.15 a) b) -V/F control modes (scalar)

Output Voltage

P136=0

P142

0P145

OutputFrequency

b) Quadratic V/F

Vector Control Modes:

Table 6.8 – Configuration of P203 for using or not of the specialfunction PID Regulator.

Page 104: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

105

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

P2050123

4, 56

Read ParameterP005 [Output Frequency (Motor)]P003 [Output Current (Motor)]P002 (Value Proportional to Frequency)P007 [Output Voltage (Motor)]Not usedP040 (PID Process Variable)

In the event of a fault trip, except for E14, E24 and E41,the inverter can initiate an automatic reset after the timegiven by P206 is elapsed.If P206 2 Auto-Reset does not occur.If after Auto-Reset the same fault is repeated three ti-mes consecutively, the Auto-Reset function will bedisabled. A fault is considered consecutive if it happensagain within 30 seconds after the Auto-Reset. Thus if afault occurrs four times consecutively, this fault remainsindicated permanently (and inverter disabled).

P206 0 to 255sAuto-Reset Time [ 0 ]

1s

Range[factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / NotesPrograms all parameters to the standard factory default,when P204=5.The parameters P142 (max. output voltage), P145 (fieldweakening frequency), P295 (rated current), P308 (in-verter address) and P399 to P407 (motor parameters)are not changed when the factory default parameters areloaded through. Thus program P204 = 5.When P204 is set to 5 with the version “A2” of the controlboard, it is necessary to set P234 and P238 to 2 as wellas P236 and P240 to -50% so that the analog inputs canbe bipolar (-10 to +10) Vdc.

Selects which of the parameters listed below will beshown on the display as a default after the inverter hasbeen powered up.

P205 0 to 6Display [ 2 - P002 ]Default -Selection

P204 (3) 0 to 5Load Factory [ 0 ]setting -

It allows that the read-only parameter P002 indicates themotor speed in value, for instance, rpm.The indication of P002 is equal to the output frequencyvalue (P005) multiplied by the value of P208, i.e.,P002 = P208 x P005.If desired, the conversion from Hz to rpm is made as afunction of the pole number:

P208 0.00 to 99.9Reference Scale [ 1.00 ]Factor 0.01 (<10.0)

0.1 (>9.99)

Table 6.9 – Configuration of P205

Motor Pole Number

II polesIV polesVI poles

P208 to P002 indicatethe speed in rpm

603020

Table 6.10 – Configuration of P208 so P002 indicatesthe motor speed in rpm

Page 105: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

106

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

P215 (3)(4) 0 to 2keypad Copy [ 0 - No function ]Function -

The keypad Copy function is used to transfer the contentof the parameters from one inverter to another.

Always when programmed tovector mode (P202=2), theparameter P208 is set according to the value of P402(motor speed) to indicate the speed in rpm, in P002.

P2150

1

2

Notes-

Transfers the current parameter valuesof the inverter to non volatile memory(EEPROM) of the HMI-CFW08-RSkeypad. The current inverter parametersare not changed.Transfers the content of the non volatilememory of the keypad (EEPROM) tothe current inverter parameters.

ActionOff

Procedure is as follows:

1. Connect the keypad (HMI-CFW08-RS) to the inverterfrom which the parameters willl becopied (Inverter A -source inverter).

2. Set P215=1 (copy) to transfer the parameter valuesfrom the inverter A to the keypad. Press key.During running of the Copy Function, display will show

. P215 resets automatically to 0 (Off)after transfer has been completed.

3. Disconnect the keypad from the inverter (A).4. Concect the same keypad to the inverter to which

theparameters will be transferred (Inverter B - targetinverter).

5. Set P215=2 (paste) to transfer the content of the ofthe keypad (EEPROM has the inverterA parameters)to inverter B. Press the key. While the keypad isrunning the paste function, the display shows

, an abbreviation for paste.When P215 returns to 0, the parameter transfer hasbeen concluded. Now inveters A and B will have thesame parameter values.

Copy(inverterkeypad)

Paste(keypadinverter)

Table 6.11 – Programming P215 for Copy function execution.

Page 106: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

107

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

Figure 6.16 - Copying the parameters from the inverter A to theinverter B, by using the Copy Function and the HMI-CFW08-RS

keypad

While the keypad (HMI) is running the Copy Function(read or write procedures), you can not operate it.

NOTE!The copy function is only available when the invertersare of the same model (voltage and current) and whencompatible software versions are installed. Thesofware version is considered compatible when thedigits x and y (Vx.yz) are equal. If they are different,E10 will be displayed and the parameters will not beloaded to the destination inverter.

Please consider still the following:- If the inverters A and B are driving different motors,

check the motor parameters (P399 to P409) relatedto inverter B.

- To copy the parameter content of the inverter A toother inverter(s), repeat steps 4 to 6 above.

Parameters Parameters

EEPROMEEPROM

INVERTERB

INVERTERA

HMIkeypad(paste)

P215 = 2Press

INVkeypad(copy)

P215 = 1Press

CFW08-RS keypad CFW08-RS keypad

P219(3) 0.00 to 25.00Switching [ 6.00Hz ]Frequency 0.01HzReductionPoint

Defines the point where the switching frequency ismodified automatically to 2.5kHz.This improves considerably the measurement of theoutput current at low frequencies, and consequentlyimproves the inverter performance, mainly when invector control mode.This parameter value is zero in the models 28A and 33A/200V and 24A and 30A/380-480V, because in these

Page 107: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

108

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

In the factory default setting, the inverter is started in lo-cal mode and the key of the HMI-CFW08-P keypadwill select the local/remote mode.The inverters with dummy panel (without HMI-CFW08-Pkeypad) are factory supplied with P220=3.For more details, refer to item 6.2.6.

P220(3) 0 to 6Local/Remote [ 2 - KeySelection Source HMI-CFW08-P ]

-

Defines the source of the Local/Remote selection.

In application where it is not possible to operate the in-verter at 2.5kHz (for instance, due to acoustic noise), setP219=0.00.

Table 6.13– Configuration of P220 for defining where the Local/Remote selection is made.

models the switching frequency reduction at low speedfor maintaining the performance is not required. This ispossible because the output current acquisition circuit isdifferent in these models.It is recommended to set P219 according to the switchingfrequency as shown below:

P297 (fsw

)4 (5kHz)

6 (10kHz)7 (15kHz)

Recommended P2196.00Hz12.00Hz18.00Hz

Table 6.12 – Recommended values for P219.

P22001

2

3

4

5

6

Local/Remote SelectionAlways Local modeAlways Remote modeKey of the keypad(HMI-CFW08-P or HMI-CFW08-RP)Key of the keypad(HMI-CFW08-P or HMI-CFW08-RP)DI2 to DI4

Key of the keypad (HMI-CFW08-RS) or serial interface

Key of the keypad (HMI-CFW08-RS) or serial interface

Default Mode (*)--

Local

Remote

-

Local

Remote

Note: (*) When inverter is powered up (initialization).

Page 108: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

109

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

ThedescriptionAI1’ as apposed toAI1 refers to the analogsignal after scaling and/or gain calculations have beenapplied to it.For factory default setting, the local reference is via the

and keys of the keypad and the remotereference is via analog input AI1.The reference value set by the and keys iscontained in parameter P121.For details of theElectronic Potentiometer (EP) operation,refer to Figure 6.19.When option 4 (EP) is selected, set P265 and P266 to 5.When option 6 (multispeed) is selected, set P264 and/or P265 and/or P266 to 7.For more details, refer to items 6.2.4 and 6.2.6.

Table 6.14– Programming P221(Local Mode) or P222 (Remotemode) for speed reference selection.

P221(3) 0 to 8Local Reference [ 0 - Teclas ]Selection -

P222(3) 0 to 8Remote [ 1 - AI1 ]Reference -Selection

Defines the frequency reference selection in the Local andRemote mode.

P221/P222

0

12 or 3

456

7

8

Reference Source

Keys and of the HMIs (P121)Analog input AI1' (P234, P235 and P236)Analog input AI2' (P238, P239 and P240)Electronic potentiometer (EP)SerialMultispeed (P124 to P131)Sum of theAnalog Inputs (AI1'+AI2') 0 (negativevalues are zeroed).Sum of the Analog Inputs (AI1'+AI2')

The direction of rotation is the only operation control thatdepends on other parameter for operation - P231.For more details, refer to Items 6.2.4, 6.2.5 and 6.2.6.

P229(3) 0 to 2Local Command [ 0 - Keys ]Selection -

P230(3) 0 to 2Remote [ 1 - Terminals ]Command -Selection

Define the control sources for the inverter enablingdisabling FWD/REV and JOG.

Table 6.15– Programming P229 and P230 fororigin selection of the inverter commands.

P229/P2300

1

2

Control sourceHMI-CFW08-P or HMI-CFW08-RP KeypadTerminals (XC1)HMI-CFW08-RS keypador serial interface

Page 109: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

110

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

P234 0.00 to 9.99Analog Input AI1 [ 1.00 ]Gain 0.01

The analog inputs AI1 and AI2 define the inverterfrequency reference as shown in the following curve:

P231(3) 0 to 2Forward/Reverse [ 2 - Commands]Selection -

Defines the direction of rotation.

Table 6.16 – Programming P231 for direction ofotation selection.

P23101

2

Direction of rotationAlways forwardAlways reverseCommands as defined inP229 and P230

P134

P133

AI1/AI20

Frequency Reference

Note that there is always a dead zone at the starting ofthe curve where the frequency reference remains at thevalue of the minimum frequency (P133), even when theinput signal is changed. This dead zone is onlysuppressed when P133=0.00.

Figure 6.17 - Determination of the frequency reference from theanalog inputs AI1 and AI2

0 ................ 100%0 ................ 10V (P235/P239=0)0 ................ 20mA (P235/P239=0)

4mA............ 20mA (P235/P239=1)

The internal valueAIx’ that defines the frequency referenceto be used by the inverter, is given as percent of the fullscale reading and is obtained by using on of the followingequations (see P235 and P239):

P235/P239

0

1

2

Signal

0 to 10V

0 to 20mA

4 to 20mA

Equation

AIx'= AIx + OFFSET . GAIN10 100

AIx'= AIx + OFFSET . GAIN20 100

AIx'= AIx-4 +OFFSET . GAIN16 100

(((

Table 6.14 – Definition of the analog input signalAI1 (P235) and AI2(P239)

where:- x = 1, 2;- AIx is given in V or mA, according to the used signal(see parameters P235 and P239);

Page 110: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

111

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

P235(3)(5) 0 to 5Analog Input AI1 0 - (0 to 10)V/Function (0 to 20)mA

-

Defines the signal type of the analog input, as shown intable below:

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

P235/P239 Type/Signal excursion0 (0 to 10)V or (0 to20)mA or (-10 to +10)V1 (4 to 20)mA2

DI5,6 – NPNActive if AI1,2> 7VInactive if AI1,2 < 3V

3DI5,6 – PNP

Active if AI1,2 < 3VInactive if AI1,2 > 7V

4DI5,6 – TTL

Active if AI1,2 > 2,0Inactive if AI1,2 < 0,8

5 PTC

Table 6.18 - Signal definition of analog inputs Al1(P235) and Al2 (P239)

- GAIN is defined by the parameters P234 and P238 forAI1 and AI2 respectively;

- OFFSET is defined by the parameters P236 and P240for AI1 and AI2 respectively.

This is shown in the following block diagram:

Figure 6.18 - Block diagram of the analog inputs AI1 and AI2

As an example, see the following situation: AI1 is set tovoltage input (0 to 10V) – P235=0, AI1 =5V, P234=1.00and P236= -70%. Thus:

The motor will run in reverse direction of rotation asdefined by the commands (negative value) - if this ispossible (P231=2), with a module reference equal to 0.2or 20% of the maximum output frequency (P134). I.e., ifP134=66.00Hz, then the frequency reference is equal to13.2Hz.The following configurations are available for the version“A2” of the control board:

GAIN

P234, P238

AIx'

OFFSET (P236,P240)

P235P239

AIx

AI1' = 5 + (-70) . 1 = -0.2 = -20%10 100[

When current signals are used, change the switchposition S1:1 and/or S1:2 to ON.

P234/P2382.00

P236/P240-50.0%

Analog Input Signal(-10 to +10)V

Page 111: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

112

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

In the functions 2, 3 and 4 in P235 or P239, the analogfunction AIx leaves this function and operates as a digitalinput NPN (active with low level) or as a digital input PNP(active with high level) or as a digital input with levels TTL.The analog inputs assume the zero when no connectedto an external signal. When the Al's are used as digitalinput whith logic NPN (P235 or P239 = 3) you must inserta 10Kresistor between the control terminals 7 and 6(for AI1) or 7 and 8 (for AI2).The inverter displays E24 when the signal AIx (P235 orP239) has been configured as digital input and AIx is atthe same time an analog reference (P221/P222).To use the bipolar option (-10 to +10)V with the version“A2” of the control board (refer to item 2.4) the followingsettings are needed:- P234 = 2 and P236 = -50 - using AI1- P234 = 2 and P240 = -50 - using AI2In the option 5 in P235 or P239, the AIx can detect anovertemperature fault (E32), through the motor PTCdetector. For this, the AIx must be configured to currentinput, i. e., the switch DIP S1:3 or SI:4 must be set toON. The figure below shows how to make the PTCconnection to the inverter:

Figure 6.19 – PTC connection to the inverterthrough the XC1 connector

See description of P234

See description of P234

P236 -120 to 120Analog Input AI1 [ 0.0 ]Offset 0.1% (99.9%);

1% (100%)

P238 (6) 0.00 to 9.99Analog Input AI2 [ 1.00 ]Gain 0.01

XC1

AI1+10VAI2

6

78

S1ON

OFF1 2 3 4

PTC 1

PTC 2

P239 (3)(5)(6) 0 to 5Analog Input AI2 [ 0 - (0 to 10)V/Function (0 to 20)mA]

See description of P235

P240 (6) -120 to 120Analog Input AI2 [ 0.0 ]Offset 0.1% (99.9%);

1% (100%)

See description of P234

Page 112: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

113

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

P251 (6) 0 to 9Analog Output AO [ 0 - f

s]

Function -

P252 (6) 0.00 to 9.99Analog Output AO [ 1.00 ]Gain 0.01

P251 defines the variable to be indicated at the analogouput according to the following table:

Table 6.19– Configuration of P251

Table 6.20 – Full scale for possible variables that can berepresented by the AO

P251012

3, 5 and 84679

AO FunctionOutput frequency (Fs) - P005Frequency reference or input frequency(Fe)Output current - P003No functionTorque - P009Process variable - P040Active currentPID Setpoint

NOTE!- Option 4 is only available in the vector control mode.- Options 6 and 9 are only available from Software

Version V3.50 on.

For factory Setting, AO=10V when the output frequencyis equal to maximum frequency (defined by P134), i.e.,equal to 66Hz.Indication scale at the analog outputs (full scale =10V):

VariableFrequency (P251=0 or 1)Current (P251=2 or 7)Torque (P251=4)Process variable - PID (P251=6)Setpoint PID (P251=9)

Full scaleP134

1.5xInom

150%P528P528

P248 0 to 200Analog Inputs [ 10ms ]Filter 1msTime Constant

It configures the time constant of the analog inputs filterbetween 0 (without filtering) and 200ms.Thus the analog input will have a response time equal tothree time constants. For instance, if the time constant is200ms, and a step is applied to the analog input, theresponse will be stabilized after 600ms.

P253 0 to 1Analog Output [ 0 ]AO Signal -

Defines theanalog output signal, as shown in table below:

P253 Signal Type/Excursion0 (0 to 10)V or (0 to 20)mA1 (4 to 20)mA

Table 6.21 - Configuration of P253 to the signal type of theanalog output AO

When current signal is used, change the position of theswitches S1:2 to OFF.

Page 113: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

114

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Check possible options in the table below and detailsabout the operation of the functions in Figure 6.20.

Function Description:- Not used or general enable: P263=0

When the command source is the terminals, i. e., ifP229=1 for the local mode or P230=1 for the remotemode, the digital input DI1 operates as general enable;Otherwise, no function is attributed to the input DI1

- Not used or Start/stop: P265, P266, P267 or P268 = 8If the inverter is operating in local mode and P229=1,the digital input DI3/DI4/DI5/DI6 operates as Start/stop;If the inverter is operating in remote mode and P230=1,the digital input DI3/DI4/DI5/DI6 operates as Start/stop;Otherwise no function is associated to the inputs DI3/DI4/DI5/DI6.

- Multispeed: P264, P265, P266 or P267 = 7You must program P221 and/or P222 = 6.

- Multispeed with ramp 2 and FWD/REV with ramp 2:If different acceleration and deceleration times aredesired for a determined operation condition (forinstance, for a frequency set or for a direction of rotation),please check if it is possible to use the multispeedfunctions with ramp 2 and the FWD/REV with ramp 2.

- Accelerates EP and Decelerates EP (EP – ElectronicPotentiometer): P265=P266=5 or P267=P268=5

You must program P221 and/or P222=4

-Local/RemoteOpena/0V at the respective digital input.

- Disable Flying Start:See comments in the parameters P310 and P311.

-Manual / Automatic:Details about this function can be found in the item 6.3.5of this manual: Parameters of Special Functions.

Range[factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / NotesP263(3) 0 to 14Digital Input DI1 [ 0 - Not used orFunction General Enabling]

-

P264(3) 0 to 14Digital Input DI2 [ 0 - FWD/REV ]Function -

P265(3)(7) 0 to 15Digital Input DI3 [ 10 - Reset ]Function -

P266(3) 0 to 15Digital Input DI4 [ 8 - Not usedFunction [Start/Stop ]

-

P267(3)(6) 0 to 15Function of the [11 = not used]Digital Input DI5 -

P268(3)(6) 0 to 15Function of the [11 = not used]Digital Input DI6 -

Page 114: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

115

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

DI ParameterFuntion

DI1(P263)

DI2(P264)

DI3(P265)

DI4(P266)

DI5(P267)

DI6(P268)

General enable 1 to 7 and10 to 12 - 2 2 2 2

Start/Stop 9 - 9 9 9 9Not used and General Enable 0 - - - - -Not used or Start/Stop 0 - 8 8 8 8FWD 8 - - - - -REV - 8 - - - -FWD with ramp 2 13 - - - - -REV with ramp 2 - 13 - - - -ON 14 - - - - -OFF - 14 - - - -Multispeed - 7 7 7 7 -Multispeed with ramp 2 - - 14 - - -Increase E.P. - - 5 - 5 -Decrease E.P. - - - 5 - 5FWD/REV - 0 0 0 0 0Local/Remote - 1 1 1 1 1JOG - - 3 3 3 3No external fault - - 4 4 4 4Ramp 2 - - 6 6 6 6Reset - - 10 10 10 10Disable Flying Start - - 13 13 13 13Manual/Automatic (PID) - - 15 - - -

Not used - 2 to 6 and9 to 12

11 and12

11, 12,14 and 15

11 and12

7, 11,12, 14

and 15Increase E.P. with ramp 2 - - 16 - 16 -Decrease E.P. with ramp 2 - - - 16 - 16

Table 6.22 – Programming the DI’s functions

NOTE!Functions are activated with 0V at the digital inputwhen S1:1 is OFF.Functions are activated with 24V at the digital inputwhen S1:1 is ON.

Range[factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

Page 115: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

116

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

The charts below give provide actuation and operatingdescription of the of the relay output:

open

OutputFrequency

MotorSpeed

motor runsfreely

Time

Time0V

Accel.ramp

a) GENERAL ENABLE

D I

0V

Decel.ramp

Time

Time

Accel.ramp

open

b) START/STOP

D I

Time

Time

0V

0V

openDI2 - Stop

c) START/STOP

Time

TimeDI1 -Start open

Figure 6.20 a) to d) - Time diagrams of the digital input functions

open

Time

0V

Time

Time

0V

openDI2 - REV

DI1 - FWD

CW

CCW

d) FORWARD / REVERSE

OutputFrequency

MotorSpeed

OutputFrequency

MotorSpeed

OutputFrequency

MotorSpeed

Page 116: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

117

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Time

OutputFrequency

Motor Speed

0V

open

DI - Start/Stop

Minimumfrequency

(P133)

Reset

DI4 - DecreasePE

DI3 - IncreasePE open

Time

Time

Time

0V

0V

e) ELECTRONIC POTENTIOMETER (EP)

open

open

0V

Time

Time

MotorSpeed

DI - FWD/REV

CW

CCW

f) FWD/REV

open

open

0V

Time

0V

Time

P102

P100

DI - Start/Stop

DI - Ramp 2

g)RAMP 2

P103

P101

Time

Figure 6.20 e) to h) - Time diagrams of the digital input functions (cont.)

Time

MotorSpeed

0V

0V

Start/Stop

JOG frequency(P122)

Decel.Ramp

0VDI - JOG

Generalenabling

open

open

open

Accel.Ramp

h) JOG

Time

Time

Time

OutputFrequency

Motor Speed

Page 117: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

118

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

j) FLYING START DISABLE

Figure 6.20 i) to k) - Time diagrams of the digital input functions (cont.)

k) RESET

Time

Disabled

open

EnabledInverterstatus

DI - FlyingStart Disable

Time

Time

Fault (Exy)

Time0V

Time

Time

0V

No Error

Reset

DI - Reset open

InverterStatus (*)

(*) The condition that generated the fault persists

open

0V

Time

Time

DI - No External Fault

i) NO EXTERNAL FAULT

motor runsfreely

OutputFrequency

OutputFrequency

Motor Speed

Page 118: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

119

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Notes about the functions of the relay outputs:

1) When the definition in the function name is true, thedigital output will be activated, i.e., the relay coil isenergized.

2) When the option 'Not used' has been programmed,the relay output(s) will be disabled, i.e., the coil is notenergized.

3) CFW-08 Plus has 2 relay outputs (1 NO and 1 NCcontact). It is possible to emulate a reversal contactrelay by setting P277 = P279.

Definitions of the used symbols in the functions:- Fs = P005 - output frequency (motor)- Fe = reference frequency (ramp input frequency)- Fx = P288 - Fx frequency (user selected frequency

point)- Is = P003 - output current (motor)- Ix = P290 - Ix current (user selected current point)

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

P277(3) 0 to 7Relay Output RL1 [ 7 - No fault ]Function -

P279(3)(6) 0 to 7Relay Output RL2 [ 0 - Fs > Fx ]Function -

Check possible options on table below and details abouteach function operation on Figure 6.21.

Output/ParameterFunction

Fs > FxFe > FxFs = FeIs > IxNot usedRun (inverter enabled)No fault

P277(RL1)

0123

4 and 657

P279(RL2)

0123

4 and 657

Table 6.23 – Functions of the relay outputs

Page 119: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

120

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Figure 6.21 - Details about the operation of the digital relay output fucntions

a) Fs > Fx

FsFx (P288)

Time

OFFRelay

ON

d) Is > Ix

IsIx (P290)

Time

OFFRelay

ON

c) Fs = Fe

Fs

Time

OFFRelay

ON

Fe

Fx (P288)

Time

OFFRelay

ON

b) Fe > Fx

e) Run

Stopped motor orrunning by inertia

Time

OFFRelay

ON

Motor running

f) No Fault

Time

OFFRelay

Fault State (Exy)Ready/Run State

ON

The charts below give provide actuation and operatingdescription of the of the relay output:

s/ E0X

Fe

Page 120: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

121

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

P288 0.00 to P134Fx Frequency [ 3.00Hz ]

0.01Hz(99.99Hz);0.1Hz (100.0Hz)

P290 0 to 1.5xP295Ix Current [ 1.0xP295 ]

0.01A (9.99A);0.1A (10.0A)

Used in the relay output functions Fs>Fx, Fe>Fxand Is>Ix(see P277 and P279).

P295(3) 300 to 316Rated Inverter [ According to theCurrent (I

nom) rated inverter

current Inom

) ]-

P295

300301302303304305306307308309310311312313314315316

Rated InverterCurrent (Inom)

1.0A1.6A2.6A2.7A4.0A4.3A6.5A7.0A7.3A10A13A16A22A24A28A30A33A

Table 6.24 – Definition of the rated inverter current.

The rated inverter current can be programmed accordingto the table below.

P297(3) 4 to 7Switching [ 4 - 5kHz ]Frequency -

Defines theswitching frequencyof theIGBTs in the inveter.

The switching frequency is a comprimise between themotor acoustic noise level and the inverters IGBTs losses.Higher switching frequencies cause lower motor acousticnoise level, but increase the IGBTs losses, increasing the

P297

456

7

SwitchingFrequency(f

sw)

5kHz2.5kHz10kHz15kHz

Table 6.25– Definition of the switching frequency.

Page 121: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

122

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

drive components temperature and thus reducing theiruseful life.The predominant frequency on the motor is twice theswitching frequency setat P297.Thus, P297=4 (5kHz) results in an audible motor noisecorresponding to 10kHz. This is due to the used PWMtechnique .The reduction of theswitching frequency also contributesto the reduction of instability and ressonance that mayoccur in certain application conditions, as well as reducesthe emission of electromagnetic energy by the inveter.The reduction of the switching frequencies also reducesthe leakage currents to ground, which may avoid thenuisance activation of the ground fault protection (E00).The option 15kHz (P297=7) is not available in vectorcontrol mode or when the external serial keypad (HMI-CFW-08-RS) is used.Use currents according to table below:

Inverter Model

CFW080016S2024 ...CFW080016B2024 ...CFW080026S2024 ...CFW080026B2024 ...CFW080040S2024 ...CFW080040B2024 ...CFW080070T2024 ...CFW080073B2024 ...CFW080100B2024 ...CFW080160T2024 ...CFW080220T2024...CFW080280T2024...CFW080330T2024...CFW080010T3848 ...CFW080016T3848 ...CFW080026T3848 ...CFW080027T3848 ...CFW080040T3848 ...CFW080043T3848 ...CFW080065T3848 ...CFW080100T3848 ...CFW080130T3848 ...CFW080160T3848 ...CFW080240T3848...CFW080300T3848...

10kHz(P297=6)

1.6A1.6A2.6A2.6A4.0A4.0A7.0A7.3A10A14A18A22A25A1.0A1.6A2.6A2.7A3.6A3.9A6.5A8.4A11A12A15A16A

15kHz(P297=7)

1.6A1.6A2.1A2.6A3.4A4.0A6.3A7.3A10A12A15A18A21A1.0A1.6A2.3A2.7A2.8A3.0A6.3A6.4A9A

10A12A13A

2,5kHz(P297=5)

1.6A1.6A2.6A2.6A4.0A4.0A7.0A7.3A10A16A22A28A33A

1.0A1.6A2.6A2.7A4.0A4.3A6.5A10A13A16A24A30A

5kHz(P297=4)

1.6A1.6A2.6A2.6A4.0A4.0A7.0A7.3A10A16A22A28A33A1.0A1.6A2.6A2.7A4.0A4.3A6.5A10A13A16A24A30A

Table 6.26 – Current values for P297.

Page 122: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

123

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

P300 0.0 to 15.0DC Braking [ 0.0 ]Time 0.1s

P301 0.00 to 15.00DC Braking [ 1.00Hz ]Start Frequency 0.01Hz

P302 0.0 to 130DC Braking [ 0.0% ]Current 0.1%

The DC braking feature provides a motor fast stop viaDC current injection.The applied DC braking current, that is proportional tothe braking torque, is set at P302, and is adjusted as apercentage (%) relating to the rated inverter current.The figures below show the DC branking operation atthe two possible conditions: ramp disabling and generaldisabling.

Figure 6.22 - DC braking after ramp disabling

P301 P300

DEADTIME

open

Time

DI - Start/Stop0V

DC CURRENTINJECTION

Motor SpeedOutput Frequency

P300

open

TimeDEADTIME

DC CURRENTINJECTION

DI - General Enable

Figure 6.23 - ADC braking after general disabling

Motor SpeedOutput Frequency

0V

Page 123: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

124

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Before DC braking starts, there is a "Dead Time" (motorruns freely) required for the motor demagnetization. Thistime is function of the motor speed at which the DCbraking occurs.During the DC braking the LED display flashes

If the inverter is enabled during the braking process, thisprocess will be aborted and motor operates normally.DC braking can continue its braking process even afterthe motor has stopped. Pay special attention to thedimensioning of the motor thermal protection for cyclicbraking of short times.In applications where the motor current is lower than therated inverter current, and where the braking torque isnot enough for the braking condition, pleasecontact WEGto optimize the settings.

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

P304 P133 to P134Skip Frequency 2 [ 30.00Hz ]

0.01Hz(99.99Hz);0.1Hz (100.0Hz)

P306 0.00 to 25.00Skip Band Range [ 0.00 ]

0.01Hz

Figure 6.24 - Skip Frequency curves

P303 P133 to P134Skip Frequency 1 [ 20.00Hz ]

0.01Hz(99.99Hz);0.1Hz (100.0Hz)

This feature (skip frequencies) prevents the motor fromoperating permamently at speeds where the mechanicalsystem enters into resonance, causing high vibration ornoise levels.The enabling of this function is performed by settingP306 0.00.

2 x P306

P303

P304

P303

P304 2 x P306

FrequencyReference

Output Frequency

The passage through the skip frequency band (2xP306)uses the programmed acceleration/deceleration ramps.This function does not work properly if two skipfrequencies overlap.

Page 124: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

125

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

P308(3) 1 to 30Inverter Address (WEG Protocol)

1 to 247(Modbus-RTU)

[ 1 ]1

Sets theaddress of the inverter for theserial communication.Maximum allowable value for WEG serial protocol is 30and maximum allowable value for Modbus-RTU protocolis 247.See item 8.22 and 8.23.The serial interface is an optional inverter accessory.See items 8.9, 8.10 and 8.14 for detailed information.

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

P310(3) 0 to 3Flying Start and [ 0 - Inactive ]Ride-Through -

P311 0.1 to 10.0Voltage Ramp [ 5.0s ]

0.1s

The parameter P310 selects the active function(s):

P3100123

Flying StartInactiveActiveActive

Inactive

Ride-ThroughInactiveInactiveActiveActive

Parameter P311 sets the time required for the motorrestart, both for flying start function and the ride-throughfunction. Inother words, it defines the time to set the outputvoltage starting from 0V and up to reaching the ratedvoltage.

Operation of the flying start function:- It allows the motor to start when it is running. This

functions acts only when the inverter is enabled. Duringthe start, the inverter will impose the speed reference,creating a voltage ramp with time defined at P311.

- The motor can be started in conventional form, evenwhen the flying start has been selected (P310=1 or 2),adjusting one of the digital inputs (D13 or D14) to 13(flying start disable) and driving it (0V) during the mo-tor start.

Ride-Through operation:- Permits the inverter recovery, without disabling by E02

(undervoltage), when a momentary voltage drop in theline occurs.The inverter will be disabled only by E02, if the voltagedrop is longer than 2.0s.

- When the ride-through function is enabled (P310=2or 3) and if a voltage drop in the line occurs, so the linkcircuit voltage becomes lower than the permittedundervoltage level, the output pulses will be disabled(motor runs freely) and the inverter waits up to 2s forthe line re-establishment. If the line returns to is nor-mal status within this time, the inverter will enable againthe PWM pulses, imposing the frequency

Table 6.27– Activation of the function Flying Start and Ride Throughby the parameter P310.

Page 125: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

126

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

reference instantaneously and providing a voltageramp with time defined at P311.

- There is a dead time before this voltage ramp isstarted, required for the motor demagnetization. Thistime is proportional to the output frequency (motorspeed).

Figure 6.25 - Ride-Through actuation

P311t<2s

tdisabled.>tdeadtime

Enabled

Disabled

DC link voltage

Undervoltage level(E02)

PWM pulses

Output Voltage

0V

Output Frequency(Motor Speed)0Hz

It sets the type of the protocol for the serialcommunication.The serial interface can be configued for two distinctprotocols:WEG and Modbus-RTU.The WEG protocol is described in Item 8.22 and isselected by setting P312=0.The Modbus-RTU protocol, described in item 8.23 hasnine predefined formats, as shown in table below:

P312123456789

Rate (bps)960096009600

192001920019200384003840038400

Parity-

OddEven

-OddEven

-OddEven

P312(3) 0 to 9Serial Interface [0 - WEG ]Protocol 1

Table 6.28 – P312 configuration for Modbus-RTU protocol formats.

Page 126: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

127

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / NotesIf the inverter does not receive any valid message (viaserial interface) during the interval programmed at P314,the action set at P313 willbe performed and error E28 isshown on the display.The different actions are:- P313=0 : disables inverter via deceleration ramp;- P313=1 : triggers the general disable command of theinverter;

- P313=2 : indicates only E28;- P313=3 : changes the command reference to localmode.

If the communication is re-established, E28 switches offand the inverter does not change its status.

Actuation interval of the Serial Watchdog. If the value ofP314 is equal to 0, the Serial Watchdog function isdisabled. Otherwise, if the the inverter does not receiveany valid message during this interval, it assumes theaction that has been programmed at P313.

P313 0 to 3Serial Interface [ 2 ]Watchdog Action 1

P314 0.0 to 99.9Serial Interface [ 0.0 – DisableWatchdog Timeout Function]

0

P399(1)(3) 50.0 to 99.9Rated Motor [ according to theEfficiency inverter model ]

0.1%

Set this parameter according to motor nameplate.If this data are not available:- If the rated motor power factor is known (cos =P407),determine the efficiency by the following equation:

Where:- P is themotor power in (W) (to convert HP toW multiplyby 750, i. e., 1HP=750W).

- V is the rated motor line voltage in Volts (V) – P400- I is the rated motor current in Amperes (A) – P401- For an approximation, use the values of the table initem 9.3 of this manual.It is used only in Vector Control Mode.

6.3.4 Motor Parameters - P399 to P499

P399 =nom = 433 x PV x I x cos

P400(1)(3) 0 to 600Rated Motor [ according to theVoltage inverter model

and market ]1V

Rated motor voltage indicated on the motor nameplate.It is the rms-value of the motor line voltage.Set this parameter according to the motor nameplatedata and the connection digram in the terminal box.This parameter is used only in Vector Control Mode.

Page 127: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

128

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

P401 0.3xPInom

toRated Motor 1.3xPI

nom

Current [ according tothe inverter

model ]0.01A (9.99A);0.1A (10.0A)

Rated motor current indicated on the motor nameplate.It is the rms-value of the rated motor line current.Set this parameter according to the motor nameplate dataand the connection digram in the terminal box.This parameter is used in V/F control [slip compensationfunction and automatic torque boost function automaticIxR)] and vector control.

P402(1) 0 to 9999Rated Motor [ according toSpeed the inverter model

and market ]1rpm

Set this parameter according to the motor nameplatedata.This parameter is used only in Vector Control mode.

P403(1)(3) 0.00 to P134Rated Motor [ 50.00Hz orFrequency 60.00Hz

depending onthe market ]

0.01Hz(99.99Hz);0.1Hz (100.0Hz)

Set this parameter according to the motor nameplatedata.This parameter is used only in Vector Control mode.

P404(1)(3) 0 to 17Rated Motor [ According to thePower inverter model ]

-

Set this parameter according to motor nameplate, asshown in table below.

P404

0123456789

1011121314151617

CV0.160.250.330.50.75

11.52345

5.56

7.510

12.51520

HP0.160.250.330.5

0.751

1.52345

5.56

7.510

12.51520

kW0.120.180.250.370.550.751.11.52.23.03.74.04.55.57.59.211,215

Rated Motor power

Table 6.29 – Configuration of the value of P404 according to therated motor power.

This parameter is used only in Vector Control mode.

Page 128: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

129

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

P407(3) 0.50 to 0.99Rated Motor [ According toPower Factor the inveter model ]

0.01

Set this parameter according to motor nameplate.If this value is not available:- If the rated motor efficiency is known (nom=P399), obtainthe power factor through the following equation:

PP407 = cos = 433 x

V x I x nom

Where:- P is the motor power in (W) (to convert HP toW multiplyby 750, i. e., 1HP=750W).

- V is the rated motor line voltage in Volts (V) – P400- I is the rated motor current in Amperes (A) – P401- For an approximation, use the values of the table in item9.3 of this manual.

This parameter is used in V/F control [slip compensationfunction and automatic torque boost function (automaticIxR)] and vector control.

P409 (3) 0.00 to 99.99Motor Resistance [ According to

the inverter type ]0.01

Value estimated by the Self-Tuning routine.The table in item 9.3 shows the stator resistance forstandard, IV pole, 60Hz, 220/380V motors.The value of the stator resistance can also be entered atP409 directly, if this value is known.

NOTE!P409 shall contain the equivalent value of the statorresistance of one phase, by supposing that the themotor is star connected (Y).

NOTE!If the value of P409 is to high for the motor, a disablingof the inverter can occur due to overcurrent (E00).

Through this parameter you can run theself-tuning routine,where thestator resistanceof theused motor is estimatedautomaticaaly by the inverter. The motor will not run.By setting P408=1, the Self-Tuning routine is started.During the running of the Self-Tuning routine, the displayflashes .

If the interruption of the Self-Tuning routine is desired,press .If the estimated value of the motor stator resistance istoo high for the applied inverter (examples: motor isnot connected or motor is too small for the inverter) theinveter displays E14. You can only exit from this conditionby switching off the inverter.

P408(1)(3) 0 or 1Run Self-Tuning [ 0 ]

-

Page 129: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

130

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

setpoint (%) = setpoint (UP) x P234 x 100%full scale os the used sensor (UP)

6.3.5 Special Function Parameters - P500 to P599

6.3.5.1 PID Introduction CFW-08 is fitted with the PID regulator that can beused forclosed loop process control. This function acts as aproportional, integral andderivative regulator,superimposed on the normal inverter speed control.

The speed will be changed in order to maintain the processvariable (the variable that should be controlled - for instance:water level of a container) at the desired value, set in thesetpoint.

This regulator can, for instance, control the flow in a pipingsystem.

The setpoint (flow) can be given by the analog input AI2 orthrough P525 (digital setpoint), and the flow feedbacksignal is given at analog input AI1.

Other application examples: level control, temperaturecontrol, dosing control, etc.

Figure 6.26 shows the block diagram of the PID regulator.

The feedback signal must be sent to the analog input AI1.The setpoint is the value of the process variable at whichthe operation is desired. This value is entered as apercentage and is defined by the following equation:

6.3.5.2 Description

where both the setpoint and the full scalevalue of the sensorare given by the process unit (°C, bar, etc.).Example: a pressure transducer (sensor) with ouput 4 -20mA and full scale of 25bar (i.e., 4mA=0bar and20mA=25bar) and P234=2.00. If the control of 10bar isdesired, you should enter the following setpoint:

setpoint (%) = 10 x 2 x 100% = 80%25

The setpoint can be defined via:- Keypad: digital setpoint, parameter P525.- Analog input AI2 (only available in the CFW-08 Plus):

the percentage value is determined by consideringP238, P239 and P240 (see description of theseparameters).

Page 130: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

131

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

The parameter P040 indicates the value of the processvariable (feedback) in the scale selected at P528, that isset according to the following equation:

Example: Consider the data of the example above(pressure sensor of 0-25bar and P234=2.00) . P528 mustbe set to 25/2=12.5.

The parameter P040 can be selected as the display defaultparameter P205=6.

P528 = full scale value of the used sensorP234

Page 131: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

132

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Man

ual

(DIo

pen) Fr

eque

ncy

Refe

rnce

(Spe

ed)

Aut

omat

ic(D

Iclo

sed)

Fe(s

eefig

.6.2

)

Set

poin

tDef

initi

on(r

efer

enc

eo

fth

epr

oces

svar

iabl

e)

AI2

P23

9

AI2

Sign

alP2

40(A

I2O

ffset

)AI2

Gai

n

P525

2,3

-AI2

0-Ke

y

P22

1(L

ocal

)or

P22

2(R

emot

e)

PID

Set

poin

t(Ke

y)Se

tpoi

nt

PID

Reg

ulat

or

PID

Ram

p

P526

Proc

ess

Vari

able

Filte

r

P528

Pro

cess

Varia

ble

Scal

eFa

ctor

P23

5

AI1

Sign

al

AI1

P236

(AI1

Offs

et)AI

1G

ian

P238

P234

Fee

dbac

k(m

easu

rem

ento

fthe

proc

ess

varia

ble)

P52

2

Diff

eren

tial

Reg

ulat

or

P520

,P52

1

PIR

egul

ador

(Pro

porc

iona

l-In

tegr

al)

P134

P133

1-R

ever

sal

0-D

irect

PID

Actio

nTy

pe

DI3

(P26

5=15

)

F*(s

eefig

6.1)

P527

Ena

blin

gC

omm

and

Figure 6.26 - Block diagram of the PID regulator function

0.2

s

Page 132: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

133

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

6.3.5.3 PID Start-Up Guide Please find below astart-up procedure for thePID regulator:

Initial Definition1) Process - Definition of the PID action type that the

process requires: direct or reverse. The control actionmust be direct (P527=0) when it is required to increasethe motor speed and so also increment the processvariable. Otherwise select reverse (P527=1).Examples:a) Direct: pump driven by inverter and filling a tank

where the PID regulates the tank level. To increasethe level height (process variable) the flow must beincreased and consequently also the motor speedmust be increased.

b) Reverse: fan driven by an inverter to cool a coolingtower, with the PID controlling the temperature of thistower. When it is required to increase the towertemperature (process variable), the cooling powermust be descreased by reducing the motor speed.

NOTE!When the PID function (P203=1) is set:

The digital input DI3 is automatically set to manual/automatic (P265=15). Thus when DI3 is open, the manualmode is activated and when DI3 is closed, thePID regulatorstarts to operate (closed loop control - automatic mode).If the function of this digital input (DI3) is changed, theoperation of the inverter will be always in manual mode.If P221 or P222 is equal to 1, 4, 5, 6, 7 or 8 the E24 errormesage will be displayed. Set P221 and P222 equal to 0or 2 according to the requirement.The JOG and the FWD/REV functions are disabled. Theinveter enabling and disabling commands are defined byP229 and P230.In the manual mode, the frequency reference is given byF*, as shown in figure 6.1.When the operation mode is changed from manual toautomatic, P525 is automatically set to the value of P040(at the instant immediately before the commutation). Thuswhen the setpoint is defined by P525 (P221 or P222=0),the changing from manual to automatic is smooth [there´snot occur abrupt oscillation in the frequency (speed)reference].The analog output can be programmed to indicate theprocess variable (P040) or the PID setpoint with P251=6or 4, respectively.Figure 6.27 shows an application example of an invertercontrolling a process in closed loop (PID regulator).

Page 133: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

134

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

2) Feedback (process variable measurement):The feeback is always realized via analog input AI1.

Transducer (sensor) to be used for the feedback of thecontrol variable: it is recommended to use a sensor withfull scale with at least 1.1 times higher than the largestvalue of the process variable that shall be controlled.Example: If a pressure control at 20bar is desired, selecta sensor with a control capacity of at least 22bar.

Signal type: set P235 and the position of the switch S1on the control board according to the transducer signal(4 -20mA, 0 -20mA or 0 -10V).Set P234 and P236 according to the variation range ofthe used feedback signal (for more details, seedescription of the parameters P234 to P240).

Example: suppose the following application:- full scale of the transducer (maximum value at the

transducer output) = 25bar (FS=25);- operation range (range of interest) = 0 to 15bar

(FO=15).

Considering a safety margin of 10%, the measuring ran-ge of the process variable must be set to: 0 a 16.5bar.Thus: FM=1.1xFS=16.5.Parameter P234 must be set to:

P234 = FS = 25 = 1.52FM 16.5

As the operation range starts at zero, P236=0, thus asetpoint of 100% represents 16.5bar, i.e., the operationrange, in percentage, is within: 0 to 90.9%.

NOTE!In the most cases it is not necessary to set the gain and theoffset (P234=1.00 and P236=0.0). Thus the percentage valueof the setpoint is equivalent to the percentage value of the fullscale of the used sensor. However if the maximum resolutionof the analog input AI1 (feedback) is desired, set P234 andP238 according to comments above.

Setting of the display indication to the process variablemeasuring unit (P040): set P528 according to the full scaleof the used transducer (sensor) and defined P234 (seedescription of parameter P528 below).

Page 134: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

135

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

3) Reference (setpoint):Local/remote mode.Referencesource: set P221 or P222 according to definitonabove.

4) Speed limits: set P133 and P134 according to theapplication.

5) Indication:Display (P040): P040 can be the display default parameterby setting P205=6.Analog output (AO): it is possible to indicate the processvariable (feedback) or the setpoint of the PID regulator atthe analog output by setting P251 to 6 or 9, respectively.

Start-up1) Manual operation (DI3 open):

Display indication (P040): check indication based onexternal measurement and on the feedback signal(transducer) at AI1.Indication of the process variable at the analog output (AO),if P251=6.Set the frequency reference (F*) until the desired value ofthe process variable is reached.Only then switch to the automatic mode (inverter will setautomatically P525=P040) if P536 = 0.

2) Automatic operation: close DI3 and make the dynamicsetting of the PID regulator, i.e., adjust the proportional gain(P520), integral gain (P521) and differential gain (P522).

NOTE!The inverter setting must be correct in order to obtain a goodperformanceof thePID regualtor. Ensure the following settings:

Torque boosts (P136 and P137) and slip compensation(P138) in the V/F control (P202=0 ou 1);

Ensure that the self-tuning has been run, if in vector control(P202=2);

Acceleration and deceleration ramps (P100 to P103);

Current limitation (P169).

Page 135: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

136

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Figure 6.27 - Application example of an inverter with PID regulator

CFW-08

P525Content

Setpoint canbe changedby the keys

X1

1 2 3 4 5 6

Line

1

2S1

off on

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

DI1

-Gen

.ena

ble

DI3

-Man

ual/A

uto

DI4

-Sta

r/St

op

AI1

-Fee

dbac

k

PressureTransducer

4-20mA

0-25 bar

0-100%(0-25bar)

5k

Setpoint viaAI2 (availablewith CFW-08 Plus only)P222=2P238=1.00P239=0P240=0.00

Remote mode operation (P220=1)Setpoint via keypad.Inverter Parametrization:P220=1 P520=1.000P222=0 P521=1.000P234=1.00 P522=0.000P235=1 P525=0P238=0.00 P526=0.1sP203=1 P527=0P205=6 P528=25

Process

Page 136: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

137

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

P520 0.000 to 7.999PID Proportional [ 1.000 ]Gain 0.001

P521 0.000 to 9.999PID Integral [ 1.000 ]Gain 0.001

P522 0.000 to 9.999PID Differential [ 0.000 ]Gain 0.001

The integral gain can be defined as being the timerequired to change the PI regulator output from 0 to P134,that is given, in seconds, by the equation below:

for the following conditions:- P040=P520=0;- DI3 in automatic position.

P525 0.00 to 100.0Setpoint via [ 0.00 ]keypad of the 0.01%PID regulator

Provides the setpoint (reference) of the process viacointrol via the and keys for the PID regulator,provided that P221=0 (local) or P222=0 (remote) hasbeen set to automatic mode. If it has been set to ManualMode, the frequency reference is given by P121.

If P120=1 (backup active), the value of P525 ismaintained at the last set value (backup), even when theinverter is disabled or tuned off.

P526 0.00 to 10.00Process Variable [ 0.10s ]Filter 0.01s

It sets the time constant of the Process Variable Filter.It is useful for noise filtering at the analog input AI1(feedback of the process variable).

P527 0 to 1PID Action [ 0 ]

-

Defines the action type of the PID regulator.

Select it according to the table below:

t = 16P521.P525

P52701

Action TypeDirect

Reverse

For this themotor speed

mustIncreaseIncrease

Processvariable

requirementIncrease

Decrease

P527 to beused

0 (Direct)1 (Reverse)

Table 6.30 - Configuration of the action type of the PID regulator

Table 6.31– Description of the options operations for P527

Page 137: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

138

CHAPTER 6 - DETAILED PARAMETER DESCRIPTION

P528 0.00 to 99.9Process Variable [ 1.00 ]Scale Factor 0.01(<10.0);

0.1 (>9.99)

Defines the process variables scale. It makes theconversion between percentage value (used internally bythe inverter) and the process variable unit.

P528 defines how the process variable at P040 will beshown: P040=value % x P528.

Set P528 to:

P536 0 to 1Automatic Setting [ 0 ]of P525 -

It is posible to enable/disable the copy of P040 (PIDprocess variable) in P525 when the changing from ma-nual to automatic mode using parameter P536, that isdescribed below.

Range[Factory Setting]

Parameter Unit Description / Notes

P528 = full scale of the used sensor (FM)P234

P53601

FunctionActive (copies the value of P040 in P525)

Inactive (does not copies the value of P040 in P525)

Table 6.32 - Configuration of P536

Page 138: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

139

DIAGNOSTICSAND TROUBLESHOOTING

This chapter assists the user to identify and correct possiblefaults that can occur during the CFW-08 operation. Alsoinstructions about required periodical inspections and cleaningprocedures are also provided.

When a fault is detected, the inverter is disabled and the faultcode is displayed on the readout in EXX form, where XX isthe actual fault code.

To restart the inverter after a fault has occurred, the invertermust be reset. The reset can be made as follows:

disconnecting and reapplying the AC power (power-onreset);by pressing the key (manual reset);automatic reset through P206 (auto-reset);via digital input: DI3 (P265=10) or DI4 (P266=10),DI5 (P267=10) or DI6 (P268=10).

The table below defines each fault code, explains how to resetthe fault and shows the possible causes for each fault code.

NOTE!The fault E22, E23, E25, E26, E27 and E28 are related to theserial communication and are described in Item 8.22.5.4.

7.1 FAULTS AND POSSIBLECAUSES

FAULT RESET (1) POSSIBLE CAUSES

E00 Power-on Short-circuit between two motor phases.Output Manual (key ) Short-circuit betweenground and one ofmore outputphases.

Overcurrent Auto-reset Motor cable capacitance to ground too high, causing peak(between phases DI current at the output (see note on next page)or between phase Inertia of the load too high, or acceleration rampand ground) too short.

P169 set too high.Undue set of P136 and/or P137, when in V/F control(P202=0 or 1).Undue set of P178 and/or P409 when in vector control(P202=2).IGBT transistor module is short-circuited

E01 Power supply voltage too high, causing a DC linkDC Link voltage higher than the allowed value:

Overvoltage Ud>410V - 200-240V modelsUd>820V - 380- 480V modelsLoad inertia too high or deceleration ramp too short.Setting of P151 too high.Load inertia too high and acceleration ramp too short(vector control - P202=2)

Table 7.1 – Errors, possible causes and reset ways

CHAPTER 7

Page 139: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

140

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

E02 Power-on Power supply voltage too low, causing a DC linkDC Link Manual (key ) voltage higher than the allowed value (read the value

Undervoltage Auto-reset in parameter P004):DI Ud<200V - 200 - 240V models

Ud<360V - 380 - 480V models

E04 Ambient temperature too high (>40oC) and/or outputInverter current too high.

Overtemperature Blower locked or defective.

E05 P156 set too low for the motor that is being used.Motor/Inverter Too much load on motor shaft.

OverloadIxt Function

E06 Any DI (DI3 and/orDI4)programmed for external faultExternal Fault detection is open (not connected to GND - XC1).

E08 Electrical noise.CPU Error

(Watchdog)

E09 Contact WEG Memory with corrupted values.Program Memory (refer to section 7.3)Error (Checksum)

E10 Power-on Defective contact in the HMI-CFW08-RS cable.Keypad Manual (key ) Electrical noise in the installation (electromagnetic

Error Auto-reset interference).DI

E14 Power-on Motor is not connected to the inverter output.Self-Tuning Manual (key ) Wrong motor connection (wrong voltage, lack of one

Fault phase).The used motor is too small for the inverter(P401<0.3 x P295). Use V/Fcontrol.The value of P409 (stator resistance) is too high for theused inverter.

E24 It is automatically reset Incompatible parameters were programmed

Programming when the incompatible Refer to table 4.1.error parameters are changed

E31 It is reset automatically Keypad cable misconnected.Keypad (HMI) when the communication Electrical noise in the installation (electromagneticConnection Fault between inverter and the interference).

keypad is reestablished.

E32 Power-on Motor is under an actual overload condition;Motor Manual Reset (key ) Duty cycle is too high(too many starts/stops per

Overtemperature Auto-reset minute);DIx Ambient temperature is too high;

Bad contact or short-circuit (resistance < 100)on wiring at terminals XC1:6 and 7 or XC1:7 and 8 ofthe control board (wiring that comes from themotor thermistor - PTC)

Table 7.1 – Errors, possible causes and reset ways

FAULT RESET (1) POSSIBLE CAUSES

Page 140: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

141

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

NOTE!Long motor cables (longer than 50m (150ft)) can generateexcessive capacitance to ground. This can cause nuisanceground fault trip and consequently disabling by E00 faultimmediately after the inverter has been enabled. Solution:

Reduce the switching frequency (P297).Connect a load reactor in series with the motor supply line.Refer to Section 8.20.

NOTE!The faults act as follows:

E00 to E06: switches off the relay that has beenprogrammed to “no fault”, disables the PWM pulses,displays the fault code on the display and the “ERROR”LED flashes.Some data are saved on the EEPROM memory: keypadreference and EP (electronic potentiometer) (when thefunction “backup of the references” at P120 has beenenabled), the occurred fault number, the status of theintegrator of the IxT function (overcurrent).

E24: Indicates the fault code on the LED display.

E31: Inverter proceeds to operate normally, but it does notaccept the keypad commands; the fault code is indicatedon the LED display.

E41: does not allow inverter operation (it is not possible toenable the inverter); the fault code is indicated on the LEDdisplay and on the “ERROR” LED.

Indication on the Inverter Status LEDs:

FAULT RESET (1) POSSIBLE CAUSESE41 Contact WEG Inverter power circuit is defective.

Self- Diagnosis (refer to section 7.3)Fault

Note:(1) In case of E04 Fault due to inverter overtemperature, allow

the inverter to cool down before trying to reset it. In thetypes 7.3A and 10A/200-240V and 6.5A, 10A, 13A, 16A,24A and 30A /380-480V fitted with internal ClassA RFI-filters, the fault E04 can be caused by internal airflowovertemperature. Please check blower installed inside.

Table 7.1 – Errors, possible causes and reset ways

Page 141: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

142

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

(Flashing)

Inverter is poweredupand is ready

A fault has been detected.The Error LED flashes, indicatingthe number of the fault code.Example: E04

0,2s 0,6s

PowerLED Error LED Description

7.2 TROUBLESHOOTING

PROBLEM POINT TO BE CORRECTIVE ACTIONCHECKED

Motor does not run Incorrect wiring 1.Check the power and the control connections. For example,the digital inputs DIx programmed for Start/Stop or General Enableor No External Fault must be connected to GND (pin 5 of thecontrol connector XC1).

Analog reference 1.Check if the external signal is properly connected.(if used) 2.Check the status of the speed potentiometer (if used).

Motor does not Incorrect Programming 1.Check if the parameters are properly programmed for therotate application.

Fault 1.Check if the inverter has not been disabled due to detected faultcondition (refer to previous Table).

Motor Stall 1.Reduce the motor load.2.Increase P169 or P136/P137.

Motor speed Loose connections 1.Disable the inverter, switch OFF the power supply and tighten allvaries (oscillates) connections.

Defective speed 1.Replace the defective speed potentiometer.potentiometerVariation of the external 1.Identify the cause of the variation.analog reference

Motor speed Programming error 1.Check if the contents of P133 (minimum frequency)too high or (reference limits) and P134 (maximum frequency) are according to the motortoo low application.

Signal of the 1.Check the control signal level of the reference.Reference Control 2.Check the programming (gains and offset) at P234 to P240.

Motor nameplate 1.Check if the used motor meets the application requirements.data

Display OFF Keypad connection 1.Check the keypad connections to the inverter.

Power supply 1.The power supply must be within the following ranges:200-240V models: - Min: 170V

- Max: 264V380-480V models: - Min: 323V

- Max: 528V

Table 7.2 - Meaning of LED’s indication for drive status.

Table 7.3 - Solution for the most frequent problems

Page 142: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

143

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

NOTE!When contacting WEG for services, please have the followingdata on hand:

Inverter model;Serial number, manufacturing date and hardware revision,as indicated on the inverter nameplate (refer to section 2.4);Software version (refer to section 2.2);Information about theapplication and inverter programming.

7.3 CONTACTINGWEG

7.4 PREVENTIVEMAINTENANCE

DANGER!Always disconnect the power supply voltage before touchingany component of the inverter.

Even after switching OFF the inverter, high voltages may bepresent. Wait 10 minutes to allow complete discharge of thepower capacitors.Always connect the equipment frame to a suitableground (PE)point.

ATTENTION!Electronic boards have components sensitive to electrostaticdischarges.Never touch the components or connectors directly. If this isunavoidable, first touch the metallic frame or use a suitableground strap.

Never apply a high voltage test on the inverter!If this is necessary, contact WEG.

To avoid operation problems caused by harsh ambientconditions, such as high temperature, moisture, dirt, vibrationor premature ageing of the components, periodic inspectionsof the inverter and installations are recommended.

COMPONENTS PROBLEMS CORRECTIVEACTIONS

Terminal blocks Loose screws Tighten themLoose connectors

Blowers / Cooling Blowers are dirty Clean themsystem Abnormal acoustic noise Replace the blowers

Blower is not runningAbnormal vibrationDust in the air filters Clean or replace them

Printed circuit boards Dust, oil or moisture accumulation Clean them and/or replace themSmell Replace them

Table 7.4 - Periodic inspection after start-up

NOTE!It is recommended to replace the blowers after 40,000 hoursof operation.

Page 143: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

144

CHAPTER 7 - DIAGNOSTICS AND TROUBLESHOOTING

7.4.1 Cleaning Instructions When required to clean the inverter, flow the instructions below:

a) Cooling System:

Remove AC power from the inverter and wait 10 minutes.Removeall dust from ventilation openings by using a plasticbrush or asoft cloth.Remove dust accumulated on the heatsink fins and fromthe blower blades with compressed air.

b) Electronic Boards:

Remove AC power from the inverter and wait 10 minutes.Disconnect the inverter cables, ensuring that they aremarked carefully to facilitate later reconnection.Remove the keypad and the plastic cover (refer to section3).Remove all dust from the printed circuit boards by using ananti-static soft brush and/or remove it with an ionizedcompressed air gun; (for example: Charges Burtes Ion Gun(non nuclear) Ref. A6030-6 DESCO).

Page 144: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

145

CHAPTER 8

CFW-08 OPTIONSANDACCESSORIES

This Chapter describes the optional devices that can be usedinternal or external with the CFW-08 . Table below shows a listof existing optional devices and the types to which they areapplied. Are also given information about the optional devicesand their application.

Name

HMI-CFW08-PTCL-CFW08

HMI-CFW08-RP

MIP-CFW08-RPHMI-CFW08-RS

MIS-CFW08-RSCAB-RS-1CAB-RS-2CAB-RS-3CAB-RS-5

CAB-RS-7.5CAB-RS-10CAB-RP-1CAB-RP-2CAB-RP-3CAB-RP-5

CAB-RP-7.5CAB-RP-10

KCS-CFW08KSD-CFW08

KRS-485-CFW08

KFB-CO-CFW08

KFB-DN-CFW08

KAC-120-CFW08

KAC-120-CFW08N1M1

Function

Parallel keypad (HMI)Over to be inserted in the place of the parallel HMI (when it ismounted in the inverter or it is remote - kit KMR-CFW08-P).HMI parallel keypad. For remote use with MIP-CFW08-RPinterface and CAB-CFW08-RP (up to 10m).Interface for the external parallel keypad (remote) HMI-CFW08-RPHMI serial keypad. For remote use with MIS-CFW08-RSinterface and CAB-RS (up to 10m). Copy Function.Interface for the external serial keypad (remote) HMI-CFW08-RSCable for the remote serial keypad - cable: 1mCable for the remote serial keypad - cable: 2mCable for the remote serial keypad - cable: 3mCable for the remote serial keypad - cable: 5mCable for the remote serial keypad - cable: 7.5mCable for the remote serial keypad - cable: 10mCable for the remote parallel keypad - cable: 1mCable for the remote parallel keypad - cable: 2mCable for the remote parallel keypad - cable: 3mCable for the remote parallel keypad - cable: 5mCable for the remote parallel keypad - cable: 7.5mCable for the remote parallel keypad - cable: 10mRS-232 communication interface (PC, PLC, etc).RS-232 PC Communication kit : interface RS-232 (KCS-CFW08),cable RJ-6 to DB9, 3m long, software “SUPERDRIVE”.RS-485 serial communication interface and keypad

CANopen communication interface and keypad

DeviceNet communication interface and keypad

Interface for 120Vac digital inputs

Interface for 120Vac digital inputs + Kit NEMA 1

Models to whichare applied

All

All, however theversionA3 of thecontrol board is

needed(see item 2.4)

All, however theversionA4 of thecontrol board is

needed(see item 2.4)

22-28-33A/200-240V and 13-16-24-30A/380-480V

1,6-2,6-4,0-7,0A/200-240V and

1,0-1,6-2,6-4,0A/380-480V

WEG ItemNumber

417118200417118211

417118217

417118216417118218

4171182190307.78270307.78280307.78290307.81130307.81140307.81150307.77110307.77120307.77130307.78330307.78340307.7835417118212417118207

417118213

417118221

417118222

417118223

417118224

Table 8.1 - Available Optional Devices for the CFW-08

Page 145: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

146

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIESCHAPTER 8

Name

KAC-120-CFW08 -N1M2

KMD-CFW08-M1

KFIX-CFW08-M1

KFIX-CFW08-M2

KN1-CFW08-M1

KN1-CFW08-M2

FIL1FIL2

FIL4FEX1-CFW08

FEX2-CFW08

FS6007-16-06

FN3258-7-45

FS6007-25-08

FS6007-36-08

FN3258-16-45

FN3258-30-47

FN3258-55-52

TOR1-CFW08

TOR2-CFW08

Function

Interface for 120Vac digital inputs + Kit NEMA 2

Rail Kit -DIN EN 50.022

Fix Kit -M1

Fix Kit - M2

Kit NEMA 1/IP20 for the connection of the metallicconduit -M1

Kit NEMA1/IP20 for the connection of the metallicconduit -M2Internal class A suppressor filter RFI - A- 7.3A/200-240VInternal class A suppressor filter RFI- A - 2.7-4.3-6.5-10A/380-480VInternal class Asuppressor filter - RFI - 13-16A/380-480V10A/200-240V class ARFI filter - footprint

5A/380-480V class ARFI filter - footprint

External class B suppressor filter - RFI - 1.6-2.6-4.0A/200-240VExternal class B suppressor filter - RFI - 1.0-1.6-2.6-2.7-4.0-4.3A/380-480VExternal class B suppressor filter -RFI - 7.3A/200-240V single-phaseExternal class B suppressor filter -RFI - 10A/200-240V single-phaseExternal class B suppressor filter -RFI - 6.5-10-13A/380-480V

External class B suppressor filter - RFI16A, 24A/380-480VExternal Suppression Filter - RFIClass B - 30A/380-480VCM choke toroid #1(Thornton NT35/22/22-4100-IP12R) and plastic clampCM choke toroid #2(Thornton NT52/32/20-4400-IP12E)

Models to whichare applied

7,3-10-16A/200-240V and 2,7-4,3-6,5-10A/380-480V1.6-2.6-4.0-7.0A/

200-240V1.0-1.6-2.6-4.0A/

380-480V1.6-2.6-4.0-7.0A/

200-240V1.0-1.6-2.6-4.0A/

380-480V7.3-10-16A/200-240V

2.7-4.3-6.5-10A/380-480V

1.6-2.6-4.0-7.0A/200-240V

1.0-1.6-2.6-4.0A/380-480V

7.3-10-16A/200-240V

2.7-4.3-6.5-10A/380-480V

7.3-10A/200-240V2.7-4.3-6.5-10A/

380-480V13-16A/380-480V

1.6-2.6-4.0A/200-240V

1.0-1.6-2.6-4.0A/380-480V

1.6-2.6-4.0A/200-240V

1.0-1.6-2.6-2.7-4.0-4.3A/380-480V

7.3A/200-240V

10A/200-240V6.5-10-13A/380-480V;

7A/200-240V;7.3-10A/

200-240V trifásico16-24A/380-480V;16-22A/200-240V

30A/380-480V;33A/200-240V

2.7-4.3-6.5-10A/380-480V

2.7-4.3-6.5-10-13-16A/380-480V

WEG ItemNumber

417118225

417100879

417100994

417100995

417118209

417118210

4151.26614151.0994

4151.2148417118238

417118239

0208.2072

0208.2075

0208.2073

0208.2074

0208.2076

0208.2077

0208.2078

417100895

417100896

Table 8.1 (cont.) - Available Optional Devices for the CFW-08

Page 146: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

147

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.1 HMI-CFW08-P Parallel keypad (HMI): is the keypad that is mounted at thefront side of the inverter.

Figure 8.1 - Dimensions of the parallel HMI - HMI-CFW08-P

57

43 21

13

Figure 8.2 a) b)- Instructions for HMI-CFW-08-P insertion and removing

8.2 TCL-CFW08 Dummy panel to be inserted in the place of theparallel keypad(HMI-CFW08-P).

Figure 8.3 - Dimensions of the dummy panel TCL-CFW08 for the parallel HMI

43

57

13

8.1.1 Instruction for Insertion and Removing of the HMI-CFW08-P

1. Unlock the keypad by using a screwdriver as shown above.2. Remove the keypad by pulling on the lateral sides.

1. Place the keypad as shown above.2. Press it.

b) Removinga) Insertion

Page 147: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

148

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.3 HMI-CFW08-RP External parallel keypad: this keypad is mounted externallyto the inverter and can be used in the following cases:

Applications that require a remote keypad (up to 10m /394in);Instalation of a keypad directly on the panel door (0,12in);For a better visualization on the display and to facilitale thekey operation, when compared with the parallel keypad(HMI-CFW08-P).

The external parallel keypad (HMI-CFW08-RP) must be usedwith the MIP-CFW08-RP interface and CAB-RP-X cable.

Figure 8.4 - Dimensions of the HMI-CFW08-RP

8.3.1 HMI-CFW08-RPInstallation

The HMI-CFW08-RP can be installed directly on thepanel door(0,12in), as shown in the figures below:

Figure 8.5 - Installation of the HMI-CFW08-RP

58

98

15.936.3

NOTE!This optional not is compatible with the version “A3” and “A4”of the control board. Refer to item 2.4 for further informationon these control boards.

52mm(2.05in)

92m

m(3

.62i

n)

Max. 3mm

(0.12in)

Page 148: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

149

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.5 CAB-RP-1CAB-RP-2CAB-RP-3CAB-RP-5CAB-RP-7.5CAB-RP-10

Cables used to connect the inverter to the external parallelinterface keypad (HMI-CFW08-RP).There are 6 cables options ranging in lenghts from 1m (39in)to 10m (394in). The user must select among these lenghtsaccording to his requirement.The cable CAB-RP must be laid separately from the powerwiring by meeting the requirements for the control wiring (referto item 3.2.5).

Figure 8.7 - CAB-RP-X

8.6 HMI-CFW08-RS

Figure 8.6 - Dimensions of the MIP-CFW08-RP

432137

57

LATERAL VIEW FRONT VIEW

Figure 8.8 - Dimensions of the HMI-CFW08-RS

External serial keypad: this interface is mounted externalto the inverter and must be used when the copy function isneeded:

For more details about copy function refer to the descriptionof the parameter P215 in section 6.

It operates with theMIS-CFW08-RS and the cable CAB-RS-X,which length must be chosen according to the needs (up to10m (394in)).

58

15.9

98

8.4 MIP-CFW08-RP Isolation interface: Isolation interface installed in the inver-ter instead of the standard keypad only when the remoteparallel keypad (HMI-CFW08-RP) is used.The procedures for insertion and removing of the MIP-CFW08-RP are similar to those shown in figure 8.14 for theKCS-CFW08 module.

Page 149: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

150

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.6.2 HMI-CFW08-RSStart-up

After installation (including interconnecting cable), power-upthe inverter.

HMI-CFW08-RS must displayThe inverter programming via HMI-CFW08-RS is exactly thesame as the inverter programming via HMI-CFW08-P (formore details about the programming, refer to section 4).To enable all keys of the HMI-CFW08-RS and thus make itequivalent to HMI-CFW08-P both for programming andoperation, set the following parameters:

8.6.1 HMI-CFW08-RSInstallation

The remote serial keypad (HMI-CFW-08-RS) can be installedin the cabinet door (door thickness between 1 and 3mm), aspresented in the following figures.

Figure 8.9 - Installation of the HMI-CFW08-RS

Function via HMI-CFW08-RSFrequency referenceCommands (*)

Forward/Reverse SelectionLoca/RemoteSelection

Local ModeP221 = 0P229 = 2

Remote ModeP222 = 0P230 = 2

P231 = 2P220 = 5 (default local) orP220 = 6 (default remote)

Note:Factory setting

(*)Excepttheforward/reverseselectionthatalsodependsontheparematerP231.

Table 8.2 - Parameter setting for HMI-CFW08-RS operation

NOTE!Due to the internal processing time of CFW-08 it is notpossible to use the keypad, with the switching frequencyset to 15kHz (P297=7).This optional not is compatible with the version “A3” and“A4” of the control board. Refer to item 2.4 for furtherinformation on these control boards.

52mm(2.05in)

92m

m(3

.62i

n)

Max

.3m

m(0

.12

in)

Page 150: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

151

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.7 MIS-CFW08-RS Serial interface used exclusively for HMI-CFW08-RS keypadconnection to inverter.The procedures for insertion and removing of the MIS-CFW08-RS are similar to those shown in Figure 8.14 for theKCS-CFW08 module.

Figure 8.10 - Dimensions of the MIS-CFW08 serial communicationmodule fot the extern serial HMI

57

4321

20

Cables used to connect the inverter to the external serialinterface keypad (HMI-CFW08-RS). Thereare 6 cable optionsranging in lengths from 1m to 10 m. The user must selectamong these lengths according to his requirement.The cable CAB-RS must be laid separately from the powerwiring by meeting the requirements for the control wiring (referto item 3.2.5).

8.8 CAB-RS-1CAB-RS-2CAB-RS-3CAB-RS-5CAB-RS-7.5CAB-RS-10

NOTE!The external serial keypad (HMI-CFW08-RS) can beused upto 150m, for distance higher than 10m it is necessary to use a12Vdc external power supply in the external serial keypad, asshown in the figure below:

Figure 8.11 - CAB-RS-X

Inverter

RJ Connector

Keypad

DB9Connector

8.6.3 Keypad Copy Function The HMI-CFW08-RS keypad still has an additional function:the keypadcopy function.This function is useful whenonewantstocopy thesettings of one inverter (source inverter) to another(target inverter) or one needs to program several inverterswith the same settings.This is done as follows: the parameters of the source inverterare copied to a non-volatile memory of the HMI-CFW08-RSkeypad , and then from this keypad to another inverter (“targetinverter"). The keypad copy function is controlled by theparamater P215.For further information on this function refer to section 6.

Page 151: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

152

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.9 KCS-CFW08 Serial communication module RS-232: is inserted in the placeof the parallel keypad, enabling the RS-232 connection(connector RJ-6).The RS-232 serial interface enables the point-to-pointconnection (inverter - master). It is gavanically isolated andenables the useof interconnecting cables in lengths up to 10m.Through the RS-232 serial interface you can control, setparameters and monitor the CFW-08. The communicationprotocol is based on the communication by enquiry/response(master/slave), according to ISO 1745, ISO 646, with characterexchange of type ASCII between the inverter (slave) and themaster. The Master can be a PLC, a PC, etc. The maximumtransfer rate is 38400 bps.For the RS-485 serial communication, both point-to-point (aninverter and a master) or multipoint (up to 30 inverters andone master), you can connect the KCS-CFW08 module to anKRS-485-CFW08 module - for more details, refer to section8.11.

4321

Figure 8.12 - CAB-RS-X

Inverter

RJ11 6X6 Connector

Keypad

DB9 Connector

PIN 1 = +12Vdc (250mA)

PIN 5 = 0V

PINS DB91235

PINS RJ1645

CABLECONNECTION

NOTE: WEG supplies cables with this configuration for 15m, 20m and25m. Longer cables are not supplied by weg.

Figure 8.13 - Dimensions of the RS-232 serial communication moduleKCS-CFW08 and RJ(XC8) signal connector

57

20

Page 152: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

153

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Figure 8.14 a) b) - Insertion and removal of the serial communication module RS-232 KCS-CFW08

8.10 KSD-CFW08 The complete kit, that enables the connection of the CFW-08to a PC via RS-232 contains:- Serial communication module RS-232 (KCS-CFW08);- 3m cable RJ-6 for the DB9;- Software “SUPERDRIVE” for Windows 95/98, Windows NTWorkstation V4.0 (or later operational system), that enablesthe CFW-08 programming, operating and monitoring. Referto the SuperDrive manual for hardware and systemconfigurations.

8.9.1 Instructions forKCS-CFW08Insertion/Removal

-Connect the cable of thecommunication module to XC5

- Place the communication module asshown in figure above.- Press it.

a) Insertion

- Use a screwdriver to unlock the communication module.- Remove the module by pulling iton the lateral sides

b) Removing

- Remova o cabo do conector XC5.

Page 153: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

154

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

To install the RS-232 communication kit on the PC, proceedas follows:- Remove the parallel keypad (HMI-CFW08-P) from the

inverter.- Install the serial communication module RS-232 (KCS-

CFW08) in the place of the keypad.- Install the software “SuperDrive” in the PC.- Connect the inverter to the PC through the cable.- Follow the instruction given by the “SuperDrive”.

RS-485 Serial Communication Module and Keypad:This optional module, with an RS-485 connection (plug-inconnector) and a keypad, is installed in the front of the drive inthe place of the standard parallel keypad (HMI-CFW08-P).For instruction on how inserting and removing this module,refer to the installation instruction for the KCS-CFW08 in thismanual.The functions of each pin are indicated in the silk screeningabove the communication connector.The RS-485 interface allows a multi-point connection of up to1000m using the Modbus-RTU or WEG protocols. Theseprotocols are described in the item “Serial Communication”of this manual.It is possible to command, setup and monitor the CFW-08through the RS-485 serial interface. In this case, the mastercan be a PLC, a PC, etc.

8.11 KRS-485-CFW08

Figura 8.15 - KRS-485-CFW08 (dimensions in mm)

42.6

11

5.6

57

20

36. 8

Page 154: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

155

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

The following figure shows some possibilities for connectingthis module in a RS-485 network. Usually, the connection 1a)is applied, but connections b) and c) can also be usedaccording to the situation.Notice that terminal indicated by the symbol shall beconnected to the ground.

Figure 8.16 a) a c) - Connection possibilities for the KRS-485-CFW08 module

CANopen Communication Module and Keypad. This optionalmodule, with a CANopen interface (plug-in connector) and akeypad, is installed in the front of the drive in the place of thestandard parallel keypad (HMI-CFW08-P).For instruction on how inserting and removing this module,refer to the installation instruction for the KCS-CFW08 in thismanual.The functions of each pin are indicated in the silk screeningabove the communication connector.It is possible to command, setup and monitor the CFW-08through this communication interface. In this case, the mastercan be a PLC, the CFW-09 with a PLC board, etc.This module can be purchased along with the drive just byincluding the code “A3” in the control board field of the productpart number, such as, CFW080040S2024POA3Z (refer toitem 2.4 of this manual for further information on how orderingthe product).

8.12 KFB-CO-CFW08

Figure 8.17 - KFB-CO-CFW08 (dimensions in mm)

a) b) c)

11

5.9

57

20

36.8

42.6

CFW-08 Master/Mestre

A

B

A

B

A

B

A

B

CFW-08 Master/Mestre

COM COMCOM COM

XC12 XC12

EarthEarth

CFW-08 Master/Mestre

A

B

A

B

COM

XC12

Earth

COM

Page 155: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

156

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

The following figure shows some possibilities for connectingthe module in a CANopen network. Usually, the connection a)is applied, but connections b) and c) can also be usedaccording to the situation. Notice that terminal indicated bythe symbol shall be connected to the ground.

Figure 8.18 a) b) - Connection possibilities for the KFB-CO-CFW08 module

ATTENTION!This module can only be used with the drives that have the“A3” initials in the nameplate (refer to item 2.4 of this ma-nual). Otherwise, the CANopen communication as well asthe keypad will not work.It is not possible to use the parallel keypad, the serial remotekeypad, and the serial protocols (such as Modbus andWEG) with version “A3” of the control board.

DeviceNet Communication Module and Keypad: This optionalmodule, with a DeviceNet interface (plug-in connector) and akeypad, is installed in the front of the drive in the place of thestandard parallel keypad (HMI-CFW08-P).For instruction on how inserting and removing this module,refer to the installation instruction for the KCS-CFW08 in thismanual.The functions of each pin are indicated in the silk screeningabove the communication connector.It is possible to command, setup and monitor the CFW-08through the RS-485 serial interface. In this case, the mastercan be a PLC or other device that supports this communicationprotocol.This module can be purchased along with the drive just byincluding the code “A4” in the control board field of the productpart number, such as, CFW080040S2024POA4Z (refer toitem 2.4 of this manual for further information on how orderingthe product).

8.13 KFB-DN-CFW08

CFW-08

CAN_H

CAN_L

CAN_H

CAN_L

ShieldShield

V-V-

XC13

Master/Maestro/Mestre CFW-08

CAN_H

CAN_L

CAN_H

CAN_L

ShieldShield

V-V-

XC13

Master/Maestro/Mestreb)a)

Page 156: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

157

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Figure 8.19 - KFB-DN-CFW08 (dimensions in mm)

The figure below shows how to connect this module in aDeviceNet network (this connection follows the DeviceNetresolution).

NOTE!Terminal 5 (GND) of the control board shall be grounded.

Figura 8.20 - Connection possibilities for the KFB-DN-CFW08 module

ATTENTION!This module can only be used with the drives that have the“A4” initials in the intelligent code (refer to item 2.4 of thismanual). Otherwise, the DeviceNet communication as wellas the keypad will not work.It is not possible to use the parallel keypad, theserial remotekeypad, the parallel remote keypad and the serial protocols(such as Modbus and WEG) with version “A4” of the controlboard.

42.6

5.6

57

25.336

.8

CFW-08 Master/Maestro/Mestre

V+ V+

CAN_H

CAN_L

V-

CAN_H

CAN_L

V-

ShieldShield

XC14

Page 157: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

158

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.14 KAC-120-CFW08KAC-120-CFW08-N1M1KAC-120-CFW08-N1M2

This optional is used tooperate the digital inputs with alternatevoltage (120Vac).This board shall be externally connected to the control boardand the function of each terminal is described in the optionalitself. For safety purposes, the NEMA 1 kit shall be used alongwith this optional. Therefore, the following models can use thisoptional:

KAC-120-CFW08 (Only 120Vac board):Models: 22-28-33A/200-240V and 13-16-24-30A/380-480V

KAC-120-CFW08-N1M1 (120Vac board and KN1-CFW08-M1):Models: 1,6-2,6-4,0-7,0A/200-240V and 1,0-1,6-2,6-4,0A/380-480V

KAC-120-CFW08-N1M2 (120Vac board and KN1-CFW08-M2):Models: 7,3-10-16A/200-240V and 2,7-4,3-6,5-10A/380-480V

Figure 8.21 - KAC-120-CFW08

Detail of theKAC-120-CFW08

board

Page 158: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

159

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.15 KMD-CFW08-M1 This device must be used when the installation of the inverteron 35mm rail, according to DIN EN 50.022, is desiredOnly available for themodels: 1.6-2.6-4.0-7.0A/ 200-240V and1.0-1.6-2.6-4.0A/380-480V

Figure 8.22 - Inverter with DIN rail kit (KMD-CFW-08-M1)

Section A-A

Front View Section B

12

75

129

140

464B

B

A'A

9

Page 159: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

160

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

This kit must be used when a better access to the screw holeof the inverter is needed. Models that used this kit:KFIX-CFW08-M1Models: 1,6-2,6-4,0-7,0A/200-240V; 1,0-1,6-2,6-4,0A/380-480V

KFIX-CFW08-M2Models: 7,3-10-16A/200-240V; 2,7-4,3-6,5-10A/380-480V

8.16 KFIX-CFW08-M1KFIX-CFW08-M2

Figura 8.23 - Dimensions of the inverter with the kit (KFIX-CFW08-MX)

Dimensions (mm)A B C D E50 75 8 180 19080 115 8 228 238

KFIX-CFW08-M1KFIX-CFW08-M2

Page 160: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

161

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

a) Inverters 1.6-2.6- 4.0-7.0/220-240V;1.0-1.6-2.6-4.0/380-480V with KN1-CFW08-M1

b) Inverters 7.3-10-16A/200-240V;2.7-4.3-6.5-10A/380-480V with KN1-CFW08-M2

Figure 8.25 a) b) - External dimensions of the inverter with NEMA1/IP20 kit

Figure 8.24 a) b) - Dimensions of the NEMA1/IP20 kits

a) KN1-CFW08-M1 b) KN1-CFW08-M2

Bottom view

Frontal View Right side view

Frontal View

Bottom view

Right side view

68

38

18

141

172

10 45

22

115 150

190

234

150

89

68

75 89

106

115 86

This kit is used, when a NEMA 1/IP20 degree of protection isdesired for the inverter or when for the inverter wiring metallicconduits are desired.Models that use this kit:KN1-CFW08-M1:Models: 1.6-2.6-4.0-7.0/220-240V; 1.0-1.6-2.6-4.0/380-480VKN1-CFW08-M2:Models: 7.3-10-16A/200-240V; 2.7-4.3-6.5-10A/380-480VModels 13 and 16A/380-480V have Nema 1/IP20 degree ofprotection in the standard version.

8.17 KN1-CFW08-M1KN1-CFW08-M2

Page 161: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

162

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.18 RFI FILTER The installation of frequency inverters requires some care inorder to prevent electromagnetic interferences (EMI).This electromagnetic interference may disturb the operationof the inverter itself or other devices, such as electronicsensors, PLCs, transducers, radio equipment, etc. installedin the proximity.To avoid these troubles, follow the installation instructionscontained in this Manual.In this case, avoid the installation of electromagnetic noisegenerating circuits, such as power cables, motors, etc. nearto signal or control cables.Care should also be taken with the radiated interference, byshielding the cables and the circuits that tend to emitelectromagnetic waves and can cause interference.The electromagnetic interference can also be transmittedthrough power supply line. This type of interference isminimized in the most cases by capacitive filters which arealready installed inside the CFW-08.However, when inverters are installed in residential areas, theinstallation of additional filter may be required.These filters may be installed internally (on some types) orexternally.As defined in standards, theClass B filter has more attenuationcapacity than the Class A filter , thus being more suitable forresidential areas.Section 8.1 lists the available RFI filters with the respectiveinverter models.The inverters with internal ClassA filters have thesame externaldimensions as the inverters without filter.Theexternal Class B filters must be installed between thepowersupply lineand the inverter input, as shown in figure8.26 below.Instructions for the RFI filter installation:

Install the inverter and the filter on a metallic groundedplate as near to each other as possible and ensure agood electrical contact between the grounded plate andthe inverter and filter frames.For motor connection use a shielded cable or individualcables inside a grounded metallic conduit.

NOTE!For installations that must meet the European standards referto item 3.3.

Page 162: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

163

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

PowerSupply

Ground

Filter

CFW-08

Driving Panel

Conduit orShielded

Cable Motor

Motor Ground(frame)

PE PE

Figure 8.26 - Connection of the external RFI filter - Class B

8.19 LINE REACTOR Due to the input circuit characteristic, common to the mostinverters available on the market, consisting of a diode rectifierand a capacitor bank, the input current (drained from the powersupply line) of inverters is a non sinusoidal waveform andcontains harmonics of the fundamental frequency (frequencyof the power supply - 60Hz or 50Hz).These harmonic currents circulate through the power supplyline and cause harmonic voltage drops which distort the powersupply voltage of the inverter and other loads connected tothis line. These harmonic currents and voltage distortions mayincrease the electrical losses in the installation, overheatingthe components (cables, transformers, capacitor banks,motors, etc.), as well as lowering the power factor.Theharmonic input currents depend on the impedance valuesthat are present in the rectifier input/output circuit.The installation of a line reactor reduces theharmonic contentof the input current, providing the following advantages:

increasing the input power factor;reduction of the RMS input current;reduction of the power supply voltage distortion;increasing the life of the DC link capacitors.reduction of the overvoltage transients that may occur inthe power supply line.

Install it as close aspossible to the inverter

Page 163: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

164

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

[H]L = 1592 xV x Ve

f IS, nom . f

where:V - desired line voltage drop, in percentage (%);V

e- phase voltage at inverter input (line voltage),given in Volts (V);

Is,nom

- rated inverter output current;f - line frequency.

8.19.1 Application Criteria In a general manner, the CFW-08 series inverters can beconnected directly to thepower supply line without line reactors.But in this case, ensure the following:

To ensure the inverter expected life, a minimum lineimpedance that introduces avoltage drop as shown in table8.3, as a function of the motor load, is recommended. If theline impedance (transformers + wirings) is lower than thesevalues, it is recommended to use line reactor(s).When it is necessary to add a line reactor to the system, itis recommended to size it considering a 2% to 4% voltagedrop (for nominal output current). This pratice is results in acompromise between motor voltage drop, power factorimprovement and harmonic current distortion reduction.This practice results in a compromise between motorvoltage drop, power factor improvement and harmoniccurrent distortion reduction.Always add a line reactor, when capacitors for power factorcorrection are installed in the same line and near to theinverter.Figure 8.27 shows the line reactor connection to the input.Use the following equation to calculate the value of the linereactor necessary to obtain the desired percentage of thevoltage drop:

Table 8.3 - Minimum network impedance for several load conditions.

Model

1,6A / 200-240V2,6A / 200-240V4,0A / 200-240V7,0A / 200-240V7,3A / 200-240V10A / 200-240V16A / 200-240V22A/200-240V28A/200-240V33A/200-240V

1,0A / 380-480V1,6A / 380-480V2,6A / 380-480V2,7A / 380-480V

With rated loadat the inverter output

(IS

= IS,nom

)

0,25%0,1%1,0%0,5%1,0%0,5%1,0%2,0%1,0%1,0%

0,05%0,05%0,1%

0,25%

With 80% of therated load

(IS = 0,8IS,nom)

0,1%0,05%0,5%

0,25%0,25%0,25%0,5%1,0%0,5%0,5%

0,05%0,05%0,05%0,1%

With 50% of therated load

(IS = 0,5IS,nom)

0,05%

Minimum Line Impedance

Page 164: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

165

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

a) Single-phase power supply models

b) Three-phase power supply models

Figure 8.27 b) -Power connection with line reactor at the input

Note: These values ensure a life of 20,000 hour for the DC link capacitors, i.e., they can be operatedduring 5 years with operation of 12 hours per day.

Table 8.3 cont. - Minimum network impedance for several load conditions.

Model

4,0A / 380-480V4,3A / 380-480V6,5A / 380-480V10A / 380-480V13A / 380-480V16A / 380-480V24A/380-480V30A/380-480V

With rated loadat the inverter output

(IS = IS,nom)

1,0%1,0%0,5%0,5%0,5%1,0%1,0%1,0%

With 80% of therated load

(IS = 0,8IS,nom)

0,5%0,5%

0,25%0,25%0,25%0,5%0,5%0,5%

With 50% of therated load

(IS = 0,5IS,nom)

0,05%

Minimum Line Impedance

L

PEPER UVWPE

Q1

S T U V W PE

LineN

Shield

Shield

PE UVW

RST

RPE S T U V WPE

Line

PE

Figure 8.27 a) - Power connection with line reactor at the input

Page 165: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

166

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

As an alternative criterion, we recommend to add a line reactoralways the transformer that supplies the inverter has ratedoutput higher than indicated in table below.

Table 8.4 - Alternative criteria for use of line reactor - Maximum valuesof the transformer power

Transformer Apparent Power [kVA]

1.6A and 2.6A/200-240V4A/200-240V

7A and 7.3A/200-240V10A/200-240V

16-22-28 and 33A/200-240V1A-1.6A and 2.6A/380-480V

4.0 and 4.3A/380-480V2.7A/380-480V

6.5-10A and 13A/380-480V16-24 and 30A/380-480V

30 x rated inverter apparent power [kVA]6 x rated inverter apparent power [kVA]

10 x rated inverter apparent power [kVA]7.5 x rated inverter apparent power [kVA]4 x rated inverter apparent power [kVA]

30 x rated inverter apparent power [kVA]6 x rated inverter apparent power [kVA]

15 x rated inverter apparent power [kVA]7.5 x rated inverter apparent power [kVA]

4 x rated inverter apparent power [kVA]

Inverter Model

Note: The value for the rated apparent power can be obtained in section 9.1 of thismanual.

The use of a three-phase load reactor, with an approximate2% voltage drop, adds an inductance at the inverter PWMoutput to the motor. This decreases the dV/dt (voltage risingrate) of the pulses generated at the inverter output. Thispractice reduces the voltage spikes on the motor windingsand the leakage currents that may be generated when longcables between inverter and motor (as a function of the"transmission line" effect) are used.There are many factors that influence the peak level (Vp) andthe rise time (tr) of voltage spikes: cable type, cable length,motor size, switching frequency and so on.WEG recommends using a load reactor when the supplyvoltage is higher than 500V, though this is not always required.WEG, as a specialist in both motors and inverters (VSDs) isable to provide an integrated solution.The load reactor value is calculated in the same way as theline reactor (see item 8.19.1).If the cables between inverter and motor are longer that 100m(300ft), the cable capacitance to ground may cause nuisanceovercurrent (E00) trips. In this case it is also recommended touse a load reactor.

8.20 LOAD REACTOR

Page 166: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

167

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Figure 8.28 - Load Reactor Connection

8.21 DYNAMIC BRAKING The dynamic braking is used where short deceleration timesare required or where high inertia is present.For the correct sizing of the braking resistor, application datasuch as, deceleration time, load inertia, braking duty cyclemust be considered.In any case, the rms current capacity and the maximum peakcurrent must be considered.The maximum peak current defines the minimum permittedohmic value for the braking resistor. Refer to table 8.5.The DC link voltage level for the actuation of the dynamicbraking is as follows:

Inverter supplied with 200V to 240V: 375VdcInverters supplied with 380V to 480V: 750Vdc

RST

PE PER S T U V W UVW

8.21.1 Resistor Sizing The braking torque, that can beobtained through the frequencyinverter, without using the dynamic braking module, varies from10% to 35% of the rated motor torque. During the decelerationprocess, the kinetic energy of the load is regenerated into theinverter DC link. This energy loads up the capacitors byincreasing the DC link voltage. When this energy is not fullydissipated, it may generate a DC link overvoltage trip (E01)and disabling the inverter.To obtain higher braking torques, the use of dynamic brakingis recommended where the excess of the regenerated energyis dissipated in a resistor mounted externally to the inverter.The braking resistor is defined according to the decelerationtime, load inertia and resistive torque.In most cases, a resistor with an ohmic value as indicated onthe table below and a power rating of 20% of the driven motorcan be used.Use wire type or tape type resistors with suitable insulation towithstand the instantaneous current peaks.

PE

DisconnectingSwitch

PE

LoadReactor

Shield

Page 167: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

168

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Table 8.5 - Recommended Braking Resistors

(*1) The rms braking current can be determined by:

where tbr

corresponds to the sum of the braking times duringthe most severe 5 minute cycle.

8.21.2 Installation Connect the braking resistor between the +UD and BRpower terminals (refer to section 3.2.1).Make this connection with a twisted pair. Run this cableseparately from any signal or control wire. Size the cablecross section according to the application, by consideringthe maximum and the rms current.If the braking resistor is installed inside the inverter panel,consider the heat dissipated by the resistor when definingthe panel ventilation.

For critical applications with very short braking times, highinertia loads (ex.: centrifuges) or with very short and frequentduty cycles, contact WEG to define the most suitable resistor.

Irms = Imax . tbr[min]

5

Inverter Model

1,6A / 200-240V2,6A / 200-240V4,0A / 200-240V7,0A / 200-240V7,3A / 200-240V10A / 200-240V16A / 200-240V22A / 200-240V28A / 200-240V33A / 200-240V1,0A / 380-480V1,6A / 380-480V2,6A / 380-480V2,7A / 380-480V4,0A / 380-480V4,3A / 380-480V6,5A / 380-480V10A / 380-480V13A / 380-480V16A / 380-480V24A / 380-480V30A / 380-480V

MaximumBrakingCurrent

10 A15 A20 A26 A26 A38 A

6 A

6 A8 A16 A24 A24 A35 A43 A

RMSBraking

Current (*1)

5 A7 A

10 A13 A18 A18 A

3,5 A

3,5 A4 A

10 A14 A14 A21 A27 A

RecommendedResistor

392722151510

127

127 100 4733332218

RecommendedWiring

2,5 mm2 / 14 AWG2,5 mm2 / 14 AWG4 mm2 / 12 AWG

6mm2 / 10AWG6mm2 / 10AWG6mm2 / 10AWG

1,5 mm2 / 16 AWG

1,5 mm2 / 16 AWG2,5 mm2 / 14 AWG4 mm2 / 12 AWG6 mm2 / 10 AWG6 mm2 / 10 AWG

6 mm2 / 10 AWG6 mm2 / 10 AWG

Pmax

(MaximumResistor Power)

3,9 kW6,1 kW8,8 kW

10.1 kW10.1 kW14.4 kW

4,6 kW

4,6 kW6,4 kW12 kW19 kW19 kW27 kW33 kW

Prated

(RatedResistor Power)

0,98 kW1,3 kW2,2 kW2.5 kW3.2 kW3.2 kW

1,6 kW

1,6 kW1,6 kW4,7 kW6,5 kW6,5 kW7.9 kW

10.9 kW

Braking not available

Braking not available

Braking not available

Page 168: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

169

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Figure 8.29 - Braking resistor connection(only for models 7.3-10-16A/200-240V and 2.7-4.3-6.5-10-13-16A/380-480V)

8.22 SERIALCOMMUNICATION

8.22.1 Introduction

MOTORPOWERSUPPLY

CONTACTOR

CONTROLPOWERSUPPLY

OVERLOADRELAY

THERMOSTATBRAKING

RESISTOR

UVW

RST

BR +UD

The basic objective of the serial communication is the physicalconnection of the inverters in an equipment network configuredas follows:

DANGER!The internal inverter braking circuit and the braking resistorcan be damaged when not correctly sized or when the linevoltage exceeds the maximum allowed value.In this case, the only guaranteed method to avoid burning thebraking resistor and eliminate risk of fire is the installation of athermal overload relay in series connected with the resistorand/or the installation of a thermostat on the resistor body,wiring it in such a way that it disconnects the inverter powersupply in case of overheating, as shown in figure 8.29:

Master PC, PLC,etc.

Slave 1(Inverter)

Slave 2(Inverter)

Slave n(Inverter)

n 30

Page 169: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

170

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

- IDENTIFICATIONnetwork address;inverter;software version.

- CONTROLgeneral enabling/disabling;enabling/disabling by ramp;direction of rotation;frequency/speed reference;local/remote;JOG;error and fault RESET.

- STATUS RECOGNITIONready;Sub;run;local/remote;error;JOG;direction of rotation.

- PARAMETER READING

- CHANGE OF PARAMETERS

Typical examples of network use:PC (master) for the parametrization of one or severalinverters at the same time;SDCD monitoring inverter variables;PLC controlling the operation of one or more inverters in aindustrial process.

The physical connection between the inverters and the masteris performed according to one of the standards below:a. RS-232 (point-to-point up to 10m);b. RS-485 (multipoint, galavanic isolation, up to 1000m);.

8.22.2 Interfaces Description

The inverters have a control software for data transmission/reception through serial interface, thus facilitating the receptionof data that have been sent by the master and the transmissionof the data requested by the master.This softwaresupports WEG protocoland ninedifferent Modbus-RTU modes, that can be selected via parameter P312. Thesubjects broached in this Section refers to WEG protocol. Formore details about the Modbus-RTU, see item 8.23.The transfer rate is 9600 bits/s, following an exchange protocolof question/answer typeby usingASCII characters.The master is able to realize the following operations related toeach inverter:

Page 170: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

171

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

ADDRESS(P308)

0123456789

10111213141516171819202122232425262728293031

ASCIICHAR DEC HEX

@ 64 40A 65 41B 66 42C 67 43D 68 44E 69 45F 70 46G 71 47H 72 48I 73 49J 74 4AK 75 4BL 76 4CM 77 4DN 78 4EO 79 4FP 80 50Q 81 51R 82 52S 83 53T 84 54U 85 55V 86 56W 87 54X 88 58Y 89 59Z 90 5A] 91 5B\ 92 5C[ 93 5D^ 94 5E_ 95 5F

This interface permits the linkage of up to 30 inverters to amaster (PC, PLC, etc.), attributing and setting for each inver-ter an address (1 to 30). In addition to these 30 addresses,there are two addresses to perform special tasks:

Address 0: any inverter in the network is inquired,independently of its address. Only one inverter can beconnected to the network (point-to-point) in order to preventshort-circuits in the line interface.Address 31: a control can be transmitted to all inverters inthenetwork simultaneously, without acceptance recognition.List of addresses and corresponding ASCIIcharacters.

8.22.2.1 RS-485

Table 8.6 - Adresses and corresponding ASCII characters list

Page 171: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

172

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

The connection between the network participants is performedthrough a pair of wires. The signal levels are according to theEIA RS-485 STANDARD with differential receivers andtransmitters. You must use the serial communication moduleKRS-485-CFW-08 (refer to section 8.11).When themaster is fitted only with aRS-232 serial interface, youmust apply a level conversion module from RS-232 to RS-485.

In this case we have the connection of a master to an inverter(point-to-point). The data can be exchanged in a bi-directionalway, but not simultaneously (HALF DUPLEX).The logical levels meet the EIA RS-232C STANDARD, thatspecifies the use of balanced signals. In this case one wire isused for the transmission (TX), onewire for the reception (RX)and one wire for the return (0V).This configuration is a threewire economy model.You must use theRS-232 (KCS-CFW08) module in the inver-ter (refer to Section 8.9).

The tems of this Section describe the protocol used in theserial communication.

Parameters: are those existing in the inverters whosevisualization or alteration is possible through the keypad(HMI) interface.Variables: are values that have specific inverter functionsand that can be read and, in some cases, modified by themaster.

8.22.2.2 RS-232

8.22.3 Definitions

8.22.3.1 Used Terms

Other ASCII characters used by the protocol

ASCIICODE DEC HEX

0 48 301 49 312 50 323 51 334 52 345 53 356 54 367 55 378 56 389 57 39= 61 3D

STX 02 02ETX 03 03EOT 04 04ENQ 05 05ACK 06 06NAK 21 15

Table 8.7 - Others ASCII characters used by the protocol

Page 172: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

173

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM:

INVERTER

BASICVARIABLES

PARAMETERS

MASTERSERIAL CONNECTION

VARIABLES

8.22.3.2 Parameter/VariablesResolution

1 start bit;8 information bits [they codify text characters andtransmission characters, removed from the 7 bits code,according to ISO 646 and complemented for theeven parity(eighth bit)];1 stop bit.

After the start bit, follows the less significant bit:

8.22.3.3 Character Format

UnitHAVs

%-

rpm

Resolution0.01Hz/unit0.01A/unit

1V/unit0.1s/unit

0.01%/unit0.01/unit

1RPM/unit

ParameterFrequency

Current (AC or DC)Voltage (AC or DC)

TimePercentage

Gainrpm

The variables and the parameters have 16 bits format, i. e.,from -32767 to +32768 for signed variables or from 0 to 65535for unsigned variables.All variables are considered as signed variables, except thoserelated to time (time, period, frequency).In addition, the maximum and minimum values must considerthe parameter range limits.The below shows the main variables and their respectiveresolutions.

START B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8 STOP

Startbit

Stopbit8 bits of information

8.22.3.4 Protocol The transmission protocol meets the Standard ISO 1745 forthe transmission in code.Only text character sequences without headers are used. Theerror/fault monitoring is made through transmission relatedto the parity of the individual 7 bit characters, according toISO 646. The parity monitoring is made according to DIN66219 (even parity). Themaster uses two types of messages:

Basic variables: are those that can be accessed onlythrough the serial interface.

Table 8.8 - serial communication resolutions

Page 173: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

174

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

READING MESSAGE: for inquiring of the inverter variablecontent;

WRITING MESSAGE: to change the inveter variablecontent or to send comands to the inverters.

NOTE!No transmission between two inverters is possible.The master has the bus access control.

Reading Message:"This message allows the master receive from the inverter thecontent that corresponding to the inquiry code. In the answermessage, the inverter transmits the data requested by themaster and it finishes the transmission with EOT.

2) Inverter:

ADR STX = xH xH xH xH ETX BCC

CODE VAL(HEXADECIMAL)

TEXT

EOT ADDR ENQ

CODE

Format of the reading message:

EOT: control character of End Of Transmission;ADR: inverter address (ASCII@, A, B, C, to ) (ADdRess);CODE: address of the 5-digit variable coded in ASCII;ENQ: control character ENQuiry (enquiry);

Format of the inverter answer message:

ADR: 1 character - inverter address;STX: control character - Start of TeXt;TEXT: consists in:

CODE: address of the variable;“ = “: separation character;VAL: 4 digits value HEXADECIMAL;

ETX: control character - End of Text;BCC: CheCksum Byte - EXCLUSIVE OR of all bytes betweenSTX (excluded) and ETX (included).

NOTE!In some cases there can be an inverter answer with:

3) Master:

EOT

1) Master:

Page 174: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

175

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Writing MessageThis message sends data to the inverter variables. The inver-ter will answer by indicating if the data have been accepted ornot.

Format of the writing message:

EOT: control character of the End Of Transmission;ADR: inverter address;STX: control character of the Start of TeXt;TEXT: consists in:

CODE: variable address;“ = “: separation character;VAL: 4 HEXADECIMAL digit values;

ETX: control character of the End of TeXt;BCC: CheCksum Byte - EXCLUSIVE OR of all the bytesbetween STX (excluded) and ETX (included).

Format of the inverter answer message:

Acceptance:ADR: inverter address.ACK: ACKnowledge control character.

Without Acceptance:ADR: inverter address.NAK: Not AcKnowledge control character.This means that the data were not accepted and the

addressed variable continues with its old value.

The inverter and the master test the message syntax.The answers for the respective verified conditions are definedas follows:

8.22.3.5 Execution andMessage Test

ADR NAK refer to Item 8.22.3.5

1) Master:

EOT ADR STX = xH xH xH xH ETX BCC

CODE VAL(HEXADECIMAL)

TEXT

2) Inverter:

ADR NAK ADR ACKor

3) Master:

EOT

Page 175: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

176

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.22.3.6 MessageSequence

8.22.3.7 Variable Code

CODE

Number of the basic variable or parameter

Equipment number:"7" = CFW08"9" = any inverterSpecifier:0 = basic variables1 = P000 to P0992 = P100 to P1993 = P200 to P2994 = P300 to P3995 = P400 to P4996 = P500 to P5997 = P600 to P699

Reading Message:no answer: with wronG message structure, controlcharacters received incorrectly or wrong inverter address;NAK: CODE corresponding to a non existing variable orthere is only a writing variable;TEXT: with valid messages.

Writing Message:no answer: with wrong message structure, controlcharacters received incorrectly or wrong inverter address;NAK: CODE corresponding to a non existing variable, wrongBCC (checksum byte), only reading variable, VAL out ofthe allowed range for the respective variable, operationparameter out of the alteration mode;ACK: with valid message;The master should maintain, between two variabletransmissions to the same inverter, a waiting time that iscompatible with the used inverter.

The messages are processed in the inverter in determinedintervals.Therefore, a pause larger than the sum of the times T

proc+ T

di

+ Ttxi should be ensured between two messages addressedto the same inverter (refer to section 8.22.6.).

The field designated with CODE determines the parameteraddress and the basic variables formed by 5 digits (ASCIIcharacters) as follows:

Equal to zero (0)

X X X X X

Page 176: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

177

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

3) Master:

EOT

Reading of the output current from the inverter 10 (supposingthe the same was at 7.8Aat the moment of the enquiry).

1) Master:

EOT J 0 1 7 0 3 ENQ

P003 Code

addr.10

2) Inverter:

P003 Code P003=30CH=780=7.8/0.01

addr.10

3) Master:

EOT

J STX 0 1 7 0 3 = 0H 3H 0H CH ETX BCC

8.22.4 MessageExamples

Change of the minimum frequency (P133) to 6.00Hzin theinverter 7.

1) Master:

Fmin Fmin=258H=600=6.00/0.01

addr. 7

2) Inverter:

G ACK

EOT G STX 0 2 7 3 3 = 0H 2H 5H 8H ETX BCC

8.22.5 Variables andErrorsof the SerialCommunication

8.22.5.1 Basic VariablesV00 (code 00700)Indication of the inverter model (reading variable):The reading of this variable permits the identification of theinverter type. For the CFW-08 this values is 7, as defined in8.22.3.7.

V02 (code 00702)Indication of the inverter status (reading variable):

Logical status (byte-high)Error code (byte-low)

Page 177: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

178

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

EL8: 0 = ramp enabling (start/stop) inactive1 = ramp enabling

EL9: 0 = general enabling inactive1 = general enabling active

EL10: 0 = Reverse1 = Forward

EL11: 0 = JOG inactive1 = JOG active

EL12 0 = local1 = remote

EL13: 0 = without undervoltage1 = with undervoltage

EL14 : not usedEL15: 0 = without error

1 = with error

InverterenabledEL8=EL9=1

}

Error Code: hexadecimal error numberEx.: E00 00H

E01 01HE10 0AH

V03 (code 00703):Selection of the Logical ControlWriting variable, whose bits have the following meaning:

BYTE HIGH: desired action mask. It order to enable theaction, the corresponding bit should be set to 1.

CL8: 1 = enabling ramp (start/stop)CL9: 1 = general enablingCL10: 1 = forward/reverse rotationCL11: 1 = JOGCL12: 1 = local/remoteCL13: not usedCL14: not usedCL15: 1 = inverter “RESET”

where:Logical Status:

EL15 EL14 EL13 EL12 EL11 EL10 EL9 EL8

CL15 CL14 CL13 CL12 CL11 CL10 CL9 CL8

MSB LSB

Page 178: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

179

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

BYTE LOW: logical level of the desired action.

CL0: 1 = enabling (run)0 = disabling by ramp (stop)

CL1: 1 = enabling0 = general disabling (stops by inertia)

CL2: 1 = forward0 = reverse

CL3: 1 = JOG active0 = JOG inactive

CL4: 1 = remote0 = local

CL5: not usedCL6: not usedCL7: the transition in this bit from 0 to 1 causes the inverter

“RESET” when anyerror condition is present.

NOTES!Disabling via DIx has priority over this disabling.To disable the inverter via serial interface, setCL0=CL1=CL8=CL9=1, while the external disabling(example, via DI) must be inactive.If CL1=0 and CL9=1, it will occur general disabling.If CL0=0 and CL8=1, the inverter will be disabled via ramp.

V04 (code 00704)Frequency reference is given by the serial interface:(reading/writing variable). Allows to send the frequencyreference to the inverter, when P221=5 in local mode andP222=5 in remote mode. The variable resolution is shown onitem 8.22.3.2.

V05 (code 00705)Enabled controls by the serial interface (readingvariable):

CL7 CL6 CL5 CL4 CL3 CL2 CL1 CL0

MSB LSB

CHSH CHSL CHSL CHSL CHSL CHSL CHSL CHSL CHSL0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

MSB LSB

Page 179: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

180

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Inverter enabling (provided P229=2 for LOC or P230=2 for REM).

8.22.5.2 Message Exampleswith Basic Variables

CHSL0: 1 - serial local referenceCHSL1: 1 - serial local forward/reverse selectionCHSL2: 1 - serial local On/Off selectionCHSL3: 1 - serial local JOGCHSL4: 1 - serial remote referenceCHSL5: 1 - serial remote forward/reverse selectionCHSL6: 1 - serial remote On/Off selectionCHSL7: 1 - serial remote JOG selectionCHSH0: 1 - serial local/remote selection.

Changing inverter from forward to reverse (provided P229=2 for LOC or P230=2for REM) - if P231 = 2.

1) Master:

C. L. Code general enabling=1ramp enabling=1

addr. 7

2) Inverter:

G ACK

3) Master:

EOT

EOT G STX 0 0 8 0 3 = 0H 3H 0H 3H ETX BCC

1) Master:

C. L. Code Reverse = 0

addr. 7

EOT G STX 0 0 8 0 3 = 0H 4H 0H 0H ETX BCC

2) Inverter:

G ACK

3) Master:

EOT

JOG enabling (provided P229=2 for LOC or P230=2 for REM).

Page 180: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

181

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.22.5.3 ParametersRelated to theSerialCommunication

Parameter Description

Local/Remote selection

Local reference selectionRemote reference selection

Local command selection

Remote command selectionForward/Reverse selectionInverter address on the Serial Communication

Network (value range from 1 to 30)

Serial Interface ProtocolSerial Interface WatchdogAction

Serial Interface Watchdog Timeout

Parameter Number

P220

P221P222

P229P230

P231P308

P312P313

P314

Error reset

1) Master:

C. L. Code RESET=1

addr. 7

2) Inverter:

G ACK

3) Master:

EOT

EOT G STX 0 0 7 0 3 = 8H 0H 8H 0H ETX BCC

1) Master:

C. L. Code JOG active=1

addr. 7

2) Inverter:

G ACK

EOT G STX 0 0 7 0 3 = 0H 8H 0H 8H ETX BCC

3) Master:

EOT

For further information about the parameter above, refer toChapter 6 - Detailed Parameter Description.

Table 8.9 - Parameters related to the serial communication

Page 181: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

182

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

They act as follows:they do not disable the inverter;they do not disable the fault relay;they inform in the word the logical status (V02).

Fault types:E22: longitudinal parity fault (BCC);E24: parametrization fault (when some of the situationsoccurs as indicated in table 5.1 (incompatibility betweenparameters) or when there is a parameter change attemptthat can not be changed with running motor).E25: variable or parameter not existing;E26: expected values out of allowed limits;E27: writing attempt in a read only variable or logicalcommand disabled;E28: serial interface watchdog timeout error.

Note!If a parity fault is detected during inverter data reception, themessage will be ignored. The same happens when syntaxerrors occur.Ex.:

Code values different from the numbers 0, to ,9;Separation character different from “ = “, etc.

8.22.5.4 Errors Related tothe SerialCommunication

8.22.6 Time for Read/Writeof Messages

MASTER Tx: (data)

RSND (request to send)

INVERTER

TxD:(data)

tproc tdi ttxi

Times (ms)Tproc

Tdi

Ttxi readingwriting

Typical102

15

3

Page 182: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

183

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Figura 8.30 - CFW-08 network connection through RS-485 serial interface

NetworkMaster

(PC, PLC)

RS-485

CFW-08

CableShielding

A BRS-485XC29

A B

RS-485XC29

CFW-08 CFW-08

KRS-485-CFW08

NOTE!The wiring of the RS-232 must be laid separately from thepower cables and the control wiring in 110V/220V.

NOTE!You can not use RS-232 and RS-485 simultaneously.

654

123

TX0VRX

+5VRTS0V

Figure 8.31 - Description of the XC8 (RJ-6) connector

Notes:LINE TERMINATION: connect the termination resistors atthe ends of the line.LINE TERMINATION: include line termination (120) at theends, and only at the line ends.GROUNDING OF THE CABLE SHIELD: connect theshielding to the equipment frame (suitable grounding);RECOMMENDED CABLE: for balanced shielding.Ex.: AFS series, manufacturer KMP.

Figure below shows the pin position of the XC8 connector ofthe KCS-CFW08-S module.

8.22.7 PhysicalConnectionRS-232 and RS-485

Page 183: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

184

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Master Query MessageAddress (1 byte)

Function Code (1 byte)Data (n bytes)CRC (2 bytes)

Address (1 byte)Function Code (1 byte)

Data (n bytes)CRC (2 bytes)

SlaveAnswer Message

8.23 MODBUS-RTU

8.23.1 Introduction toModbus-RTU Protocol

Modbus protocol has been already developed 1979 firstly.Currently it is a wide diffused open protocol, used by severalmanufacturers in different equipment. The Modbus-RTUcommunication of the do CFW-08 has been developed byconsidering two documents:

1. MODBUS Protocol Reference Guide Rev. J, MODICON,June 1996.

2. MODBUS Applicat ion Protocol Specification,MODBUS.ORG,may 8th 2002.

In these documents are defined the format of the messagesused by these elements that are part of the Modbus network,the services (or functions) that can be made available vianetwork, and also how these elements exchange the data onthe network.

8.23.1.1 TransmissionModes

8.23.1.2 Message Structure inRTU Mode

The Modbus RTU network operates in Master-Slave systemand it can consist of up to 247 slaves but only one Master. Themaster always initiates the communication with a question toa slave and the slave answers the question. Both messages(question and answer) have the same structure: Address,Function Code, and CRC. Depending on what is beingrequested, only the data field has variable length.

Two transmission modes are defined in the protocol definition:ASCII and RTU. The transmission modes define the form howthe message bytes are transmitted. It is not permitted to usethe two transmission modes on the same network.In the RTU modeeach transmitted word has one start bit, eightdata bits, 1 parity bit (optional) and 1 stop bit (2 stop bits, if noparity bit is used). Thus the bit sequence for the transmissionof 1 byte is as follows:

Figure 8.32 - Message Structure

Start B0 B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 Parity or Stop Stop

Page 184: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

185

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Address:The master initiates the communication by sending one bytewith the address of the slave to which the message isaddressed. The slave with the right slave address initiatesthe message with its own address. The master can also senda message destined to address 0 (zero), which means thatthe message is destined to all network slaves (broadcast). Inthis case no slave will answer to the master.

Function Code:This field contains an only byte, where the master specifiesthe type of service or the function requested to theslave (read,write, etc.). According to the protocol, each function is used toaccess a specific data type. In the CFW-08 all data areavailable as holding type registers (referenced from theaddress 40000 or’ 4x’). Besides these registers, the inverterstatus (enabled/disabled, with error/noerror and the commandfor the inverter (run/stop, run CW/CCW, etc.) can be alsoaccessed through the coils read/write functions or the internalbits (referenced from the address 00000 or ‘0x’ on).

Data Field:This field has variable length. The format and the content ofthis field depend on the used function and transmitted values.This field and the respective functions are described in item8.23.3.

CRC:The last part of the message is the field for checking thetransmission errors. Theused method is theCRC-16 (CyclingRedundancy Check). This field is formed by two bytes, wherethe least significant byte (CRC-) is transmitted first and onlythen the most significant byte is transmitted (CRC+).CRC calculation is started by loading a 16-bit variable(mentioned from now on as CRC variable) with FFFFh value.Then following steps are executed with the following routine:

1. The first message byte (only the data bits - the start bit,parity bit and stop bit are not used) is submitted to the XORlogic (OR exclusive) with the 8 least significant bits of theCRC variable, returning the result to the CRC variable,

2. Then the CRC variable is displaced oneposition to the right,in the direction of the least significant bit and the positionof the most significant bit is filled out with zero 0 (zero).

3. After this displacement, the flag bit (bit that has beendisplaced out the CRC variable) is analyzed, by consideringthe following:

If the bit value is 0 (zero), no change is made.If the bit value is 1, the CRC variable content is submittedto XOR logic with a constant A001h value and the valueis returned to the CRC variable.

Page 185: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

186

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Figure 8.33 - Times required during the communication of a message

T11 bits = Time to transmit one word of the message.Tentre bytes = Timebetween bytes (can not be longer than T3,5x).T3,5x = Minimum interval to indicate the begin and the

end of the message (3,5 x T11bits).

Signal

Time T11 bits

T3,5 x

Tbetween bytes

T3,5 x

Message

Comunication T11 bits

T3,5x

9600 bits/s 1,146 ms 4,010 ms19200 bits/s 573s 2,005 ms38400 bits/s 285s 1,003 ms

4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the eight displacements havebeen realized.

5. Repeat the steps 1 to 4, by using the next byte messageuntil the whole message have been processed. The endcontent of the CRC variable is the value of the CRC fieldthat is transmitted at the end of the message. The leastsignificant part is transmitted first (CRC), only then the mostsignificant part (CRC+) is transmitted.

Times between Messages:In the RTU mode there is no specific character that indicatesthe beginning or theend of a message. Thus theonly indicationfor the beginning or the end of a new message is the datatransmission absence in the network by 3.5 times the timerequired for transmission of one data word (11 bits). Thus if amessage is initiated after elapsing of the minimum timerequired without transmission, the network elements assumethat the received character represents the beginning of a newmessage. In similar mode, after this time has elapsed, thenetwork elements will assume that the message has beenended.

If during the transmission of a message, the time betweenthe bytes is longer than this minimum required time, themessage will be considered invalid, since the inverter willdiscard the already received bytes and will mount a newmessage with the bytes that are being transmitted.The table below shows the time for three dif ferentcommunication rates.

Table 8.10 - Times required during the communication of a message

Page 186: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

187

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.23.2.2 InverterConfiguration inthe Modbus-RTUNetwork

8.23.2 Operation of theCFW-08 in theModbus-RTUNetwork

The CFW-08 frequency inverters operate as slaves of theModbus-RTU network. The communication initiates with themaster of the Modbus-RTU network requesting a service for anetwork address. When the inverter is configured to thecorresponding address, it processes the question andanswers to the master as requested.

8.23.2.1 InterfaceDescription

The CFW-08 frequency inverters use a serial interface for thecommunication with the Modbus-RTU network. There are twoways to perform the connection between the network masterand the CFW-08:

RS-232:The interface is used for the point-to-point connection(between a single slave and the master).Max. distance: 10 meters.Signal levels according to EIA STANDARD RS-232C.Three wires: transmission (TX), reception (RX) and return(0V).The RS-232 module (KCS-CFW08) must be used (seeitem 8.9).

RS-485:This interface is used for multipoint connection (severalslaves and the master).Max. distance: 1000 meters (use of shielded cables).Signal levels according to EIA STANDARD RS-485.Must be used with the module RS-485 (KRS-485-CFW08- see item 8.11).

Note: For connection, see 8.22.7.

To ensure a correct communication in the network, you mustconfigure the inverter address in the network as well as thetransfer rate and the existing parity type, besides the correctphysical connection.

Inverter Address in the Network:The inverter address is defined through theparameter P308.If the serial communication type (P312) has been configuredto Modbus- RTU, you may select the addresses from 1 to247.Each slave shall have a different address.The master does not have address.The slave address must be known, even when connectionis made point-to-point.

Page 187: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

188

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.23.2.3 Access to theInverter Data

All parameters and available basic variables for the CFW-08can be accessed through the network:

Parameters: are those set in the inverter and that can bedisplayed and changed through the HMI (Human-MachineInterface) (see item 1 - Parameters).Basic Variables: are the internal inverter variables that canbe accessed only through serial interface. For instance,trough these basic variables you can change the speedreference, read the inverter status, enable or disable theinverter, etc. (see item 8.22.5.1 - Basic Variables).Register: nomenclature used to represent both parametersand basic variables during data transfer.Internal Bits: bits that are accessed only through the serialinterface and that are used for inverter status controllingand monitoring.

Item 8.22.3.2 defines the resolution of the parameters andvariables transmitted via serial interface.

Available Functions and Response Times:In the Modbus RTU protocol specification is defined thefunctions used for accessing different types of registersdescribed in thespecification. In the CFW-08 both parametersand basic variables aredefined as being holding type registers(referenced as 4x). In addition to these registers, it is alsopossible to access the internal controlling and monitoring bitsdirectly (referenced as 0x).Following services (or functions) are available in the CFW-08frequency inverter for accessing these registers:

Read CoilsDescription: reading of internal register blocks or coils.Function code: 01.Broadcast: not supportedResponse time: 10 to 20 ms.

Read Holding RegistersDescription: reading of register blocks of holding type.Function code: 03.Broadcast: not supportedResponse time: 10 to 20 ms.

Write Single CoilDescription: writing in a single internal bit or coil.Function code: 05.Broadcast: supported.Response time: 10 to 20 ms.

Transmission Rate and Parity:Both configurations are defined by parameter P312.

Baud rates: 9600, 19200 or 38400 bits/s.Parity: None, odd parity, even parity.All slaves and even the network master must use the samebaud rate and parity.

Page 188: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

189

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Parameters

Parameter NumberEndereço Modbus

Decimal HexadecimalP000 0 0000hP001 1 0001h

P100 100 0064h

... ... ...

... ... ...

Table 8.11 - Parameters addressing

Write Single RegisterDescription: writing in a single register of holding type.Function code: 06.Broadcast: supportedResponse time: 10 to 50 ms.

Write Multiple CoilsDescription: writing in internal bit blocks or coils.Function code: 15.Broadcast: supportedResponse time: 10 to 20 ms.

Write Multiple RegistersDescription: writing in register blocks of holding type.Function code: 16.Broadcast: supportedResponse time: 10 to 50 ms for each written register.

Read Device IdentificationDescription: Identification of the inverter model.Function code: 43.Broadcast: not supported.Response time: 10 to 20 ms.

NOTE!TheModbus RTU network slaves are addressed from 1 to247.Master uses address 0 to send messages that are commonto all slaves (broadcast)

Data Addressing and Offset:The CFW-08 data addressing is realized with an offset equalto zero that means that the address number is equal to theregister number. The parameters are available from address0 (zero) on, whilst the basic variables are available fromaddress 5000 on. In same way, the status bits are madeavailable from address 0 (zero) on and the control bits aremade available from address 100 on.Table below shows the addressing of bits, parameters andbasic variables:

Page 189: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

190

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

NOTE!All registers (parameters and basic variables) are consideredas holding type registers, referenced from 40000 or 4x, whilstthe bits are referenced from 0000 or 0x.The status bits have the same functions of the bits 8 to 15 ofthe logic status (basic variable 2). These bits are availableonly for read, thus any attempt towrite command returns errorstatus to the master.

Commands BitsModbus Address

Decimal HexadecimalBit 100 100 64hBit 101 101 65h

Bit 107 107 6Bh

Bit Number

... ... ...

Table 8.14 - Command bits addressing

Basic VariablesModbus Address

Decimal HexadecimalV00 5000 1388hV01 5001 1389h

V05 5005 138Dh

Number of theBasic Variable

... ... ...

Table 8.12- Basic variables addressing

Status BitsModbus Address

Decimal HexadecimalBit 0 00 00hBit 1 01 01h

Bit 7 07 07h

Bit Number

... ... ...

Table 8.13 - Status bits addressing

Bit Number

Bit 0

Bit 1

Bit 2

Bit 3

Bit 4

Bit 5

Bit 6

Bit 7

Status BitsFunction

0 = Ramp enabling inactive1 = Ramp enabling active0 = General enabling inactive1 = General enabling active0 = Counter-clockwise direction of rotation1 = Clockwise direction of rotation0 = JOG inactive1 = JOG active0 = Local Mode1 = Remote Mode0 = No undervoltage1 = With undervoltageNot used0 = No fault1 = With fault

Table 8.15 - Status Bits signified

Page 190: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

191

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Bit Number

Bit 100

Bit 101

Bit 102

Bit 103

Bit 104

Bit 105Bit 106

Bit 107

Command Bits

Function0 = Ramp disable (stops)1 = Ramp enable (runs)0 = General disable1 = General enable.0 = Counter-clockwise direction of rotation1 = Clockwise direction of rotation0 = JOG disable1 = JOG enable0 = Goes to local mode1 = Goes to remote modeNot usedNot used0 = It does not reset inverter1 = It resets inverter

8.23.3 Detailed FunctionDescription

This section describes in details the functions that areavailable in the CFW-08 for the Modbus RTU communication.Please note the following during the message preparation:

Values are always transmitted as hexadecimal values.The address of one data, the data number and the value ofthe registers are always represented through 16 bits. Thusthese fields are transmitted by using two bytes (high andlow). To access the bits, and the form to represent one bitdepend on the used function.The messages, both for enquiry and response, cannot belonger than 128 bytes.The resolution of each parameter or basic variable is asdescribed in item 8.22.3.2.

8.23.3.1 Function 01 -Read Coils

It reads the content of an internal group of bits that mustcompulsorily in a numerical sequence. This function has thefollowing structure for the read and response messages (thevalues are always hexadecimal, and each filed represents onebyte):

Query (Master)Slave address

FunctionInitial bit address (byte high)Initial bit address (byte low)Number of bits (byte high)Number of bits (byte low)

CRC-CRC+

Response (Slave)Slave address

FunctionByte Count Field (number of data bytes)

Byte 1Byte 2Byte 3etc toCRC-CRC+

Table 8.16 - Command bits signified

Table 8.17 - Function 01structure

The command bits are available to read and write and theyhave the samefunction of the logic command bits 0 to7 (basicvariable 3), however no requiring the use of the mask. Thebasic variable 3 write influences the status of these bits.

Page 191: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

192

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Each response bit is placed at a position of the data bytessent by the slave. The first byte, from the bits 0 to 7, receivesthe first 8 bits from the initial address indicated by the master.The other bytes (if the number of the read bits is higher than8) remain in the same sequence. If the number of the readbits is not a multiple of 8, the remaining bits of the last byteshould be filled out with 0 (zero).

Example: reading of the status bits for general enable (bit1) and direction of rotation (bit 2) of then CFW-08 at theaddress 1:

Query (Master)Field Value

Slave address 01hFunction 01h

Initial bit address (byte high) 00hInitial bit address (byte low) 01hNumber of bits (byte high) 00hNumber of bits (byte low) 02h

CRC- EChCRC+ 0Bh

Response (Slave)Field Value

Slave address 01hFunction 01h

Byte Count 01hStatus of the bits 1 and 2 02h

CRC- D0hCRC+ 49h

8.23.3.2 Function 03 -Read HoldingRegister

It reads the content of a group of registers that must becompulsorily in a numerical sequence. This function hasfollowing structure for the read and response messages (thevalues are always hexadecimal values, and each fieldrepresents one byte):

As the number of read bits in the example is smaller than 8,the slave required only 1 byte for the response. The value ofthe byte was 02h,That as binary value will have the form 0000 0010. As thenumber of read bits is equal to 2, only the two less significantbits, that have the value 0 = general disable and 1 = directionof rotation are of interest, are of interest. The other bits, asthey did not be requested, are filled out with 0 (zero).

Query (Master)Slave address

FunctionInitial register address (byte high)Initial register address (byte low)Number of registers (byte high)Number of registers (byte low)

CRC-CRC+

Response (Slave)Slave address

FunctionByte Count Field

Data 1 (high)Data 1 (low)Data 2 (high)Data 2 (low)

etc toCRC-CRC+

Table 8.18- Message example using function 01

Table 8.19 - Function 03 structure

Page 192: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

193

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.23.3.3 Function 05 -Write Single Coil

This function is used to write a value to a single bit. The bitvalue is represented by using two bytes, where FF00hrepresents the bit that is equal to 1, and 0000h represents thebit that is equal to 0 (zero). It has the following structure (thevalues are always hexadecimal, and each field represents onebyte):

Example: Read of the value proportional to the frequencyvalue (P002) and motor current (P003) of the CFW-08 ataddress 1:

Query (Master)Field Value

Slave address 01hFunction 03h

Initial register (byte high) 00hInitial register (byte low) 02h

Numberofregisters (bytehigh) 00hNumber of registers (byte low) 02h

CRC- 65hCRC+ CBh

Response (Slave)Field Value

Slave address 01hFunction 03h

Byte Count 04hP002 (high) 09hP002 (low) C4h

P003 (high) 02hP003 (low) 8Ah

CRC- 38hCRC+ 95h

Each register is always formed by two bytes (high e low). Forthe example, we have P002 = 09C4h, that in decimal numberis equal to 2500.As this parameter have a decimal place indication, the realread value is 25.00Hz. In the same way we will have a currentvalue P003 = 028Ah, that is equal to a 650 decimal. As thecurrent has two decimal resolution, the read value is 6.50 A.

Query (Master)Slave address

FunctionBit address (byte high)Bit address (byte low)

Bit value (byte high)Bit value (byte low)

CRC-CRC+

Response (Slave)Slave address

FunctionBit address (byte high)Bit address (byte low)Bit value (byte high)Bit value (byte low)

CRC-CRC+

Example: to drive a ramp enable command (bit 100 = 1) ofa CFW-08 at the address 1:

Query (Master)Field Value

Slave address 01hFunction 05h

Bit number (high) 00hBit number (low) 64hBit value (high) FFhBit value (low) 00h

CRC- CDhCRC+ E5h

Response (Slave)Field Value

Slave address 01hFunction 05h

Bit number (high) 00hBit number (low) 64hBit value (high) FFhBit value (low) 00h

CRC- CDhCRC+ E5h

Table 8.20 -Message example using function 03

Table 8.21 - Function 05 structure

Table 8.22 - Message example using function 05

Page 193: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

194

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

8.23.3.5 Function 15 -Write MultipleCoils

This function allows writing values for a bit group that must bein numerical sequence. This function can be also used to writea single bit (the values are always hexadecimal, and eachfield represents one byte).

8.23.3.4 Function 06 -Write SingleRegister

This function is used to write a value to a single register. Thisfunction has following structure (values are alwayshexadecimal values, and each field represents one byte):

Query (Master)Slave address

FunctionRegister address (byte high)Register address (byte low)

Value for the register (byte high)Value for the register (byte low)

CRC-CRC+

Response (Slave)Slave address

FunctionRegister address (byte high)Register address (byte low)

Value for the register (byte high)Value for the register (byte low)

CRC-CRC+

Example: write of the speed reference (basic variable 4) equalto 30.00Hz of a CFW-08 at address 1.

Query (Master)Field Value

Slave address 01hFunction 06h

Register (high) 13hRegister (low) 8ChValue (high) 0BhValue (low) B8h

CRC- 4BhCRC+ E7h

Response (Slave)Field Value

Slave address 01hFunction 06h

Register (high) 13hRegister (low) 8ChValue (high) 0BhValue (low) B8h

CRC- 4BhCRC+ E7h

For this function, the slave response will be again a copyidentical to the request made by the master. As alreadyinformed above, the basic variables are addressed from 5000,thus the basic variable 4 will be addressed at 5004 (138Ch).The value for this variable is 30.00Hz, that is represented by3000 (0BB8h).

For this function, the slave response is an identical copy ofthe query sent by the master.

Table 8.23 - Function 06 structure

Table 8.24 -Message example using function 06

Page 194: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

195

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

The value of each bit that is being sent is placed at a positionof the data bytes sent by the master. The first byte, in the bits0 to7, receives the 8 first bits by starting from the initial addressindicated by the master. The other bytes (if the number ofinscribed bits is higher than 8) remain in sequence. If thenumber of inscribed bits is not a multiple of 8, the remainingbits of the last byte should be filled in with 0 (zero).

Example: command writing for general enabling (bit 100 =1), general enabling (bit 101 = 1) and CWW-direction ofrotation (bit 102 = 0), for a CFW-08 at address 1:

Query (Master)Field Value

Slave address 01hFunction 0Fh

Initial bit (byte high) 00hInitial bit (byte low) 64h

Number of bits (byte high) 00hNumber of bits (byte low) 03h

Byte Count 01hBits Value 03h

CRC- BEhCRC+ 9Eh

Response (Slave)Field Value

Slave address 01hFunction 0Fh

Initial bit (byte high) 00hInitial bit (byte low) 64h

Number of bits (byte high) 00hNumber of bits (byte low) 03h

CRC- 54hCRC+ 15h

8.23.3.6 Function 16 -Write MultipleRegisters

This function allows writing values to a register group that mustbe in numerical sequence. This function can also be used towrite a single register (the values are always hexadecimalvalues and each field represents one byte).

As only three bits are written, the master needed only onebyte to transmit the data. The transmitted values are in thethree less significant bits of the byte that contains the valuefor the bits. The other bits of this byte remained with the value0 (zero).

Query (Master)Slave address

FunctionInitial bit address (byte high)Initial bit address (byte low)Number of bits (byte high)Number of bits (byte low)

Byte Count Field (number of data bytes)Byte 1Byte 2Byte 3etc toCRC-

CRC+

Response (Slave)Slave address

FunctionInitial bit address (byte high)Initial bit address (byte low)Number of bits (byte high)Number of bits (byte low)

CRC-CRC+

Table 8.25 -Message example using function 15

Table 8.26 - Function 16 structure

Page 195: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

196

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Query (Master)Slave address

FunctionInitial register address (byte high)Initial register address (byte low)Number of registers (byte high)Number of registers (byte low)

Byte Count Field (number of data bytes)Data 1 (high)Data 1 (low)Data 2 (high)Data 2 (low)

etc toCRC-CRC+

Response (Slave)Slave address

FunctionInitial register address (byte high)Initial register address (byte low)Number of registers (byte high)Number of registers (byte low)

CRC-CRC+

Example: writing of the acceleration time (P100) = 1,0 sand deceleration time (P101) = 2,0 s, of a CFW-08 at theaddress 20:

Query (Master)Field Value

Slave address 14hFunction 10h

Initial register (byte high) 00hInitial register (byte low) 64h

Numberofregisters (bytehigh) 00hNumberof registers (byte low) 02h

Byte Count 04hP100 (high) 00hP100 (low) 0AhP101 (high) 00hP101 (low) 14h

CRC- 91hCRC+ 75h

Response (Slave)Field Value

Slave address 14hFunction 10h

Initial register (byte high) 00hInitial register (byte low) 64h

Number of registers (byte high) 00hNumber of registers (byte low) 02h

CRC- 02hCRC+ D2h

As the two parameters have a resolution of a decimal placefor writing of 1.0 and 2.0 seconds, thus the values 10 (000Ah)and 20 (0014h) should be transmitted.

8.23.3.7 Function 43 -Read DeviceIdentification

Auxiliary function that permits reading of the manufacturer,model and version of the product firmware. It has followingstructure.

Table 8.27 - Message example using function 16

Table 8.28 - Function 43 structure

Page 196: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

197

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Query (Master)Slave address

FunctionMEI Type

Read CodeObject Number

CRC-CRC+

Response (Slave)Slave address

FunctionMEI Type

Conformity LevelMore FollowsNext Object

Number of ObjectsObject Code*Object length*Object Value*

CRC-CRC+

The fields are repeated according to the number of objects.This function permits reading of three informationcategories:Basic, Regular and Extended and each category areformed by a group of objects. Each object is formed by asequence of ASCII characters For the CFW-08 are onlyavailable basic information formed by three objects:- Object 00 - VendorName: always ‘WEG’.- Object 01 - ProductCode: formed by the product code

(CFW-08), plus the rated inverter current.- Object 02 - MajorMinorRevision: it indicates the inver

ter firmware version, in ‘VX.XX’ format.The read code indicates which information categories arebeing read and if the objects are accessed individually ofby sequence.In the example, the inverter supports 01 (basic informationin sequence), and 04 (individual access to the objects).The other fields for the CFW-08 have fixed values.Example: read o basic information in sequence, startingfrom object 00, of a CFW-08 at address 1:

Table 6.29 -Message example using function 43

Page 197: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

198

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

In the example the Object Value has not been represented ashexadecimal value, but with corresponding ASCII characters.For instance, for the object 00, the ´WEG‘ value has beentransmitted as being three ASCII characters, that ashexadecimal have the values 57h (W), 45h (E) and 47h (G).

8.23.4 Communication Errors Errors can occur during the message transmission on network,or in the content of the received messages. Depending on theerror type, inverter may answer or not to themaster:When the master sends amessage to an inverter configured atdetermined network address, the inverter will not response if:

Error in the parity bit.Error the CRC.Time out between transmitted bytes (3.5 times the timerequired for the transmission of a 11-bit word).

In thecase of asuccessful reception of the message, the inver-ter can detect problems and sendaerror message tothemasterindicating the problem that has been verified:

Invalid function (error code = 1): the requested function hasnot been implemented for the inverter.Invalid data address (error code = 2): the data address(register or bit) does not exist.Data value invalid (error code = 3): this error occurs in thefollowing conditions:- Value is out of permitted range.- Writing in data that cannot be changed (only read register,or register that does not allow changing with enabled inverter or bits of logic status).

- Writing in function of the logic command that has not beenenabled via serial interface.

Query (Master)Field Value

Slave address 01hFunction 2BhMEI Type 0Eh

Read Code 01hObject Number 00h

CRC- 70hCRC+ 77h

Response (Slave)Field Value

Slave address 01hFunction 2BhMEI Type 0Eh

Read Code 01hConformity Level 51h

More Follows 00hNext Object 00h

Number of Objects 03hObject Code 00h

Object Length 03hObject Value ‘WEG’Object Code 01h

Object Length 0EhObject Value ‘CFW-08 7.0A’Object Code 02h

Object Length 05hObject Value ‘V3.77’

CRC- C7hCRC+ DEh

Table 8.30 - Error message structure

Page 198: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

199

CHAPTER 8 - CFW-08 OPTIONS AND ACCESSORIES

Query (Master)Field Value

Slave address 01hFunction 06h

Register (high) 00hRegister (low) 59hValue (high) 00hValue (low) 00h

CRC- 59hCRC+ D9h

Response (Slave)Field Value

Slave address 01hFunction 86h

Error Code 02hCRC- C3hCRC+ A1h

8.23.4.1 Error Messages When any error occurs in the message content (not duringthe data transfer), theslave must return a message indicatingthe error type that occurred. The errors that may occur in theCFW-08 during the message processing are errors relatingto invalid function (code 01), invalid data address (code 02)and invalid data value (code 03).The messages sent by the slave have following structure:

Response (Slave)Slave addressFunction Code

(with most significant bit to 1)Error code

CRC-CRC+

Master requests from the slave at address 1 to writeparameter 89 (inexistent parameter):

Table 8.31 - Message error example

Table 8.30 - Error message structure

Page 199: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

200

TECHNICALSPECIFICATIONS

This chapter describes the technical specifications (electricaland mechanical) of the CFW-08 inverter series.

9.1 POWER DATA AC Input Specifications:Voltage: + 10%, -15% (with loss of motor efficiency)Frequency : 50/60Hz (± 2 Hz)Phase unbalance: 3%Overvoltage: Category III (EN 61010/UL 508C)Transient voltages according to Category III.

Minimum line impedance: variable according to invertermodel.Refer to Section 8.19.Power-up: max. 10 ON/OFF cycles per hour.

CHAPTER 9

1,6/200-240

0,61,62,4

3,55

0,25HP/0,18kW

No

No

Yes

Yes

18

2,6/200-240

1,02,63,9

5,75

0,5HP/0,37kW

No

No

Yes

Yes

30

4,0/200-240

1,54,06,0

8,85

1HP/0,75kW

No

No

Yes

Yes

45

7,0/200-240

2,77,0

10,5

8,15

2HP/1,5kW

No

No

No

No

80

151 x 75 x 131 mm

Single-phaseThree-phase

1,6/200-240

0,61,62,4

2,0/3,5 (4)

50,25HP/0,18kW

No

No

Yes

Yes

18

2,6/200-240

1,02,63,9

3,1/5,7 (4)

50,5HP/0,37kW

No

No

Yes

Yes

30

4,0/200-240

1,54,06,0

4,8/8,8 (4)

51HP/

0,75kWNo

No

Yes

Yes

44

Single-phase orthree-phase

Model: Current/Voltage

Power (kVA) (1)

Rated Output Current (A) (2)

Max. Output Current (A) (3)

Power Supply

Rated Input Current (A)Switching Frequency(kHz)

Max. Motor Power (5)

Dynamic Braking

Internal Class ARFI Filter (optional)

Footprint Class ARFI Filter(optional)External Class B RFI Filter(optional)Watt Loss (W)Dimensions(Height x Width x Depth)

9.1.1 200-240V Power Supply

Table 9.1 a) – Technical information about the inverter models 1.6-2.6-4.0-7.0A/200-240V

Page 200: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

201

CHAPTER 9 - TECHINICAL SPECIFICATIONS

9.1.2 380-480V Power Supply

Model: Current/Voltage

Power (kVA) (1)

Rated Output Current (A) (2)

Max. Output Current (A) (3)

Power SupplyRated Input Current (A)Switching Frequency (kHz)

Max. Motor Power (5)

Dynamic BrakingInternal Class ARFI Filter (opt.)Footprint Class ARFI Filter(optional)External Class B RFI Filter(optional)Watt Loss (W)Dimensions(Height x Width x Depth)

1,0/380-480

0,81,01,5

1,25

0,25HP /0,18kW

NoNo

Yes

Yes

17

1,6/380-480

1,21,62,4

1,95

0,5HP /0,37kW

NoNo

Yes

Yes

25

2,6/380-480

2,02,63,9

3,15

1,5HP /1,1kW

NoNo

Yes

Yes

43

4,0/380-480

3,04,06,0

4,75

2HP /1,5kW

NoNo

Yes

Yes

66

2,7/380-480

2,12,74,1

3,35

1,5HP /1,1kW

YesYes

No

Yes

45

4,3/380-480

3,34,36,5

5,25

2HP /1,5kW

YesYes

No

Yes

71

6,5/380-480

5,06,59,8

7,85

3HP /2,2kW

YesYes

No

Yes

109

10/380-480

7,61015

125

5HP /3,7kW

YesYes

No

Yes

168

151 x 75 x 131 mm 200 x 115 x 150 mm

7,3/200-240

2,87,311

8,6/16 (4)

52HP/

1,5kWYesYes

(Single-phase)

No

Yes

84

10/200-240

3,81015

12/22 (4)

53HP/

2,2kWYesYes

(Single-phase)

No

Yes

114

16/200-240

6,11624

195

5HP/3,7kW

Yes

No

No

No

183

200 x 115 x 150 mm

Single-phase orthree-phase

Three- phase

Model: Current/Voltage

Power (kVA) (1)

Rated Output Current (A) (2)

Max. Output Current (A) (3)

Power Supply

Rated Input Current (A)Switching Frequency(kHz)

Max. Motor Power (5)

Dynamic Braking

Internal Class ARFI Filter (optional)

Footprint Class ARFI Filter(optional)External Class B RFI Filter(optional)Watt Loss (W)Dimensions(Height x Width x Depth)

22/200-240

8.42233

245

7.5HP/5.5kW

Yes

No

No

No

274203x143x165mm

28/200-240

10.72842

33.65

10HP/7.5kW

Yes

No

No

No

320

33/200-240

12.633

49.5

505

12,5HP/9.2kW

Yes

No

No

No

380

290x182x196mm

Three- phase

Table 9.1 b) – Technical information about the inverter models 7.3-10-16-22-28-33A/200-240V

Table 9.2 a) - Technical information about the inverter models 1.0-1.6-2.6-2.7-4.0-4.3-6.5-10A/380-480V

Page 201: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

202

CHAPTER 9 - TECHINICAL SPECIFICATIONS

NOTE!(1) The power rating in VA is determined by the following

equation:

P(kVA)= 3 . Voltage (Volt) . Current (Amp)1000

Model: Current/Voltage

Power (kVA) (1)

Rated Output Current (A) (2)

Max. Output Current (A) (3)

Power SupplyRated Input Current (A)Switching Frequency (kHz)

Max. Motor Power (5)

Dynamic BrakingInternal Class ARFI Filter (opt.)External Class B RFI Filter(optional)Watt Loss (W)Dimensions(Height x Width x Depth)

13/380-480

9,913

19,5

155

7,5HP /5,6kW

YesYes

Yes

218

16/380-480

12,21624

195

10HP /7,5kW

YesYes

Yes

268

203 x 143 x 165 mm

24/380-480

18.32436

28.85

15HP/11kWYesYes

Yes

403

30/380-480

243045

365

20HP/15kWYesYes

Yes

500

Three- phase

290x182x196mm

Table 9.2 b) – Technical information about the inverter models13-16-24-30A/380-480V

Thevalues shown in thetablewerecalculated byconsidering therated inverter current, input voltage of 220V for the 200-240Vmodels and input voltage of 440Vfor the 380-480V models.

(2) Rated current is valid for the following conditions:Relative air humidity: 5% to 90%, non condensing.Altitude: 1000m (3300ft), up to 4000m (13200ft) with 10%derating/1000m (3300ft) of the rated current.Ambient temperature: 0ºC to 40ºC (32ºF to 104ºF) (up to50ºC (122ºF) with 2%/ºC derating of the rated current).The rated current values are valid for the switchingfrequencies of 2.5kHz or 5kHz (factory setting). For higherswitching frequencies, 10kHz and 15kHz, consider thevalues shown in the description of the parameter P297(referto chapter 6).

(3) Maximum Current:Inverter supports an overload of 50% (maximum outputcurrent = 1.5 x the rated output current) during 1 minute foreach 10 minutes of operation. For higher switchingfrequencies, 10kHz and 15kHz, consider the values shownat the description of the parameter P297(refer to chapter6).

Page 202: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

203

CHAPTER 9 - TECHINICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(4) Rated input current for single-phase operation.Note: The models CFW080016B2024...,CFW080026B2024..., CFW080040B2024...,CFW080073B2024 ... and CFW080100B2024 ... can beoperated both with single-phase voltage and three-phasevoltage without output current derating.

(5) Theindicated motor power ratings areonly orientativevaluesfor IV-pole motors and normal duty loads. The precise in-verter sizing must consider the actual motor nameplateand application data.

Page 203: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

204

CHAPTER 9 - TECHINICAL SPECIFICATIONS

9.2 ELECTRONICS/GENERAL DATA

Voltage Source InverterV/FControlor Sensorless VectorControl (V.V.C. -VoltageVector Control).PWM SVM (Space Vector Modulation).

0 to 300Hz, resolution of 0.01Hz.

Speed regulation: 1% of the rated speed.

Speed regulation: 0.5% of the rated speed.

CFW 08: 1 isolated input, resolution: 8 bits, linearity error <0,25%.(0 to 10)V or (0 to 20)mA or (4 to 20)mA, Impedance: 100k(10 to10)V, 500 (0 to 20)mA or (4 to 20)mA, programmable functionincluding digital input or PTC input.CFW 08 Plus: 2 isolated inputs, resolution: 8 bits, linearityerror <0,25%.(0to10)V/(-10 to1+0)V/(0to20)mAor (4to20)mA, Impedance:100k(0to10)V/(-10to1+0)V,500(0to20)mA/(4to20)mAprogrammablefunction.4 isolated digital inputs, NPN or PNP logic, programmable functionsCFW-08 Plus: 1 isolated output , (0 a +10)V, or (0 to 20)mA or(4 to 20)mA, RL 10k(max. load)CFW-08: 1 relaywith reverse contacts, 240Vac, 0.5A, programmablefunctionsCFW-08 Plus: 2 relays, one with NO contact and one with NCcontact. It can be programmed to operate as 1 reverse, 240Vac,0.5A, programmable functionsOvercurrent/output short-circuitOutput groung faultDC link under/overvoltageInverter overtemperatureMotor/inverter overload (IxT)External faultProgramming errorSelf-tuning errorDefective inverter8 keys: start, stop, increment, decrement, FWD/REV, JOG,local/remote and programmingLEDs display: 4 digits with 7 segmentsLEDs for FWD/REV andLOCAL/REMOTE indicationIt permits access/alteration of all parametersDisplay accuracy:- current: 10% of the rated current- speed resolution: 1rpm- frequency resolution: 0.01HzModels 22A,28A and33A/220-240Vand13A,16A, 24Aand30A/380V-480V;othermodelswithKN1-CFW08-M1andKN1-CFW08-M2kits.All models without KN1-CFW08-M1 or KN1-CFW08-M2 kit.

Inverters and semicondutorsPower Conversion EquipmentElectronic equipment for use in power installationsSafety requirements for electrical equipment for measurement,control and laboratory useEMCproductstandardforadjustablespeedelectricalpowerdrivesystems

CONTROLMETHOD

OUTPUTFREQUENCY

PERFORMANCEV/F CONTROL

VECTORCONTROL

INPUTS ANALOG(Control Board

ECC3)

DIGITAL

OUPUTS

ANALOG

(Control BoardECC3) RELAY

SAFETY PROTECTION

KEYPADSTANDARD

(HMI-CFW-08-P)(HMI)

DEGREE OFNEMA1 / IP20

PROTECTION PROTECTED CHASSIS/IP20

IEC 146UL 508 C

STANDARDS EN 50178

EN 61010

EN 61800-3

Table 9.3 - General Data of the CFW08 (control) electronics.

Page 204: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

205

CHAPTER 9 - TECHINICAL SPECIFICATIONS

The inverters are delivered with factory setting to drive WEGthree-phase, IV-pole, IP55 motors, frequencyof 60Hz, voltage of220V for 200-240V models or 380V for 380-480V modelS andwith power as indicated in theTables of Sections 9.1.1 and 9.1.2.The data of the applied motor must be programmed at P399 toP409 and the value of P409 (stator resistance) obtained throughtheSelf-Tuning(parameter estimation via P408).The table below shows the data of WEG standard motors as areference.

9.3 WEG STANDARD IV POLEMOTOR DATA

Table 9.4 - Char acteristics of WEG standard IV-pole motors

Power [P404]

(HP) (kW)0,16 0,120,25 0,180,33 0,250,5 0,37

0,75 0,551,0 0,751,5 1,102,0 1,503,0 2,204,0 3,005,0 3,706,0 4,507,5 5,5010 7,50

12,5 9,200,16 0,120,25 0,180,33 0,250,5 0,37

0,75 0,551,0 0,751,5 1,102,0 1,503,0 2,204,0 3,005,0 3,706,0 4,507,5 5,5010 7,50

12,5 9,2015 1120 15

Frame

63636371718080

90S90L

100L100L112M112M132S132M

63636371718080

90S90L

100L100L112M112M132S132M132M160M

CCurrent[P401](Amp)

0,851,121,422,072,903,084,786,478,5711,613,816,3

20,6227,2533,000,490,650,821,201,671,782,763,744,956,707,979,41

11,4915,1818,4822,730,0

VSpeed[ P402 ]

(rmp)

17201720172017201720173017001720171017301730173017401760175517201720172017201720173017001720171017301730173017401760175517551760

Efficiency atrated load[P399]

(%)

56,064,067,068,071,078,072,780,079,382,784,684,288,589,087,756,064,067,068,071,078,072,780,079,382,784,684,288,589,087,788,590,2

Power Factor atrated load

cos[P407]

0,660,660,690,690,700,820,830,760,850,820,830,860,820,840,860,660,660,690,690,700,820,830,760,850,820,830,860,820,840,860,830,83

StatorResistance (*)

[P409]()

21,7714,8710,637,373,974,132,781,550,990,650,490,380,270,230,17

65,3044,6031,9022,1011,9012,408,354,652,971,961,471,150,820,680,470,430,23

Voltage[P400]

(V)

220

380

Freq.[P403]

(Hz)

60

60

Page 205: FREQUENCY - TEMCo Industrial Powerattachments.temcoindustrialpower.com/Manual/CFW08.pdf · Fault and Status Messages ... 6.2.4 Frequency Reference Sources ... P151 DCLinkRegulationLevel

206

CHAPTER 9 - TECHINICAL SPECIFICATIONS

(*) NOTES!The inverter considers the value of the stator resistance asthe motor has been always star-connected, independentlyof its connection inthe terminal box.The values of the stator resistance is a mean value perphaseconsidering the motors with temperature rise (T) of100oC.